Home

Open LAB Instrument-Control Software Manual

1. 10001 IF Fort V Use S N to identify the instrument Fig 70 LAN interface dialog KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Valve Con figuration Manager Interface Box Config uration 54 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems All LAN controlled devices can be added and configured automatically using the AUTO CONFIGURATION button in the Instrument selection window if the device is connected switched on and has a valid IP address In addition to this you can let the software search for your already connected and switched on device from the devices configuration window For this the option Use S N To IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT must be enabled Click on the button to start the search for all connected LAN devices of the currently configured type If more than one is found all hits will be shown in the window Select the desired device from the shown list The number of position will be read out from the selected device Optionally you can enter the IP address of your device if the option USE S N To IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT is disabled Please note that if the device receives the IP address from a DHCP server for example a router the IP address may change if the device is switched off and switched on again ADD VALVE INFO Click the button ADD VALVE INFO to add the valve specific description or comments for the selected valve ADD INFo Click the button ADD INFO to enter a m
2. 109 GLP Information pump S 1050 0 2 0 2 0 20 eee 110 Gradient Modify Set new Gradient window 111 Gradient modify window freeze gradient for 2 minutes entered 112 Gradient modify window freeze gradient for 2 minutes executed 113 Extend run time Window 2 e ce eee ee eee ee eee 113 Instrument Activity Log window with direct control entries 114 P rge settings WINGOW 222 4 oscee dent eae ee tiodd e egies 114 Instrument Status detector S 2550 ee ee 115 GLP Information detector S 2550 ee ee 116 Diagnostics window MW 1 2 0 eee eee eee ee 117 Instrument Status DAD 6 1L 2 26 4654 6d daGos oe seieleesn 119 Instrument Status DAD PDA 1 0 0 0 cee ee eee 119 Diagnostics window of Diode Array Detectors PDA 1 120 Instrument Status detector 2300 2400 122 Instrument Status Conductivity Monitor S 2900 123 Instrument Status Conductivity Monitor CM 2 18 123 GLP Information Conductivity Monitor CM 2 18 124 Instrument Status Fluorescence Detector RF 20Axs 124 Diagnostics window of Fluorescence Detector RF 20Axs 126 Instrument Status user defined detector 00 127 Device information for connected Interface Box 128 Instrument Status Virtual detector 0 0 00 00 2 eee 128 Instrument Status ASM 2 1L valve va
3. Fig 105 Detector S 2550 Advanced setup window K 2600 Adwanced Settings Scan if a peak is detected At the peak apex Sar 0 010 At the beginning of the peak 0 100 Fig 106 Detector K 2600 Advanced setup window SCAN IF A PEAK IS DETECTED At any detected peak the software will perform a scan automatically if this option is activated All further settings in this area are valid for the whole method You may decide whether the scan shall be performed AT THE PEAK APEX Or AT THE BEGINNING OF THE PEAK with the given DELAY min SLOPE MAU sec HEIGHT MAU With the SLOPE and at HEIGHT settings you can define the thresholds necessary for evaluating the signal as a peak The units uAU mAU AU depend on the configuration settings CHANNEL Defines the data channel where the analysis is performed You cannot change this selection during a run However you can change the measuring wavelength of this channel as often as necessary The option Continuous quick scan cannot be enabled This option is not avail able at this time Note While scanning the data acquisition of the detector is discontinu ous For accurate and reliable qualitative and quantitative results the run should be performed twice with and without scanning INTERPOLATE PEAK PROFILE AFTER SCAN K 2600 only While scanning the peak can not be detected using the selected wavelength If this option is enabled the software will interpolate the peak
4. 107 Pretreatment setting dialog window 2 0 eee 107 Instrument Setup column oven JetStream 109 Instrument Setup column oven T 1 with valves 109 Setup window Flowmeter 2 eee eee eee eee 111 Setup window SIKA Thermometer 200 eee eee 112 Setup window Auxiliary Traces 0 cee ee eee ee eee 112 Setup window trigger tab eee ee ee ee eee 113 Instrument Status system status tab method not running 106 Instrument status example Smartline Pump 1050 107 Instrument Status system status tab method running 107 KNAUER serial port instrument status 4 108 KNAUER LAN instrument status 0008 108 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 193 Table of Figures Device Information about the connected instrument s 108 Instrument status pump S 1050 P 1 P 6 1L LPG mode
5. Fig 63 Tray configuration for the autosamplers 3950 AS 1 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Tray config uration 49 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Tray configuration Lett tray type B44 vials First destination via 10 E Right tray type 94 3 vials Reagent A vial 55 H Cancel First transport vial 5 Reagent B vial oF Use Mix amp Dilute Last transport vial Transport Viale are used for pL PickUp injection only G S sO S 79 60 64 D 78 i 68 6 6 6D 49 G0 64 ED G8 42 25 26 G0 18 8 De 63 7 65 63 D 29 a O0O00OO OVOCOO O DS GBSO OOeCoooaaoe Fig 64 Tray configuration 84 3 vials for the autosampler 3950 Note The 84 3 VIALS tray is only availabe for the autosampler 3950 It is supported in firmware version 1 14 or higher A firmware upgrade from earlier firmware versions is not available LEFT RIGHT TRAY TYPE Select the type of the installed tray for both sides The choices are 96 LOW 96 HIGH 384 LOW 48 VIALS 12 VIALS and 84 3 VIALS 84 3 VIALS for 3950 only The selection can be different for each tray side When the Prep mode is activated it is fixed on 72 VIALS If the tray type 84 3 VIALS is enabled 3950 only only left tray side this choice is for both sides this tray uses the left and right tray side Only for the tray typ
6. Full loop Partial loopfil Flush volume pl v Headspace pressure pl pick up nne Ca 4 Needle wash EuN Timed events Alarm buzzer _ Run screens Mix methods Enable tray cooling 4 Fig 131 Instrument Setup autosampler KNAUER Optimas Select the injection method by clicking on one of the available options FULL LOOP PARTIAL LOOPFILL Or uL PICK UP The maximum programmable injection volumes determine the injection method FULL LOOP Flushed loop the injection volume is equal to the loop volume As more sample than the loop volume is needed to completely fill the loop the tube volume must also be filled the loop is automatically flushed 3 x loop volume loop volumes lt 100 ul 2 x loop volume loop volumes from 100 ul to 500 ul 1 5 loop volume loop volumes gt 500 ul PARTIAL LOOPFILL the injection volume is 50 of the programmed loop vol ume uL PICK UP the injection volume can be calculated with the following for mula Injection volume loop volume 3 x needle volume 2 SYRINGE SPEED The aspirating speed of the syringe used in injection methods can be adapted depending on the viscosity of the samples the choices are Low NORMAL and HIGH The speed of the syringe during washing or rinsing procedures is not affected by this setting FLUSH VOLUME Enter the amount of sample in ul taken from a vial to preflush the needle before the loop is filled with the sample The default valu
7. 122 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method SAVE SPECTRUM The spectrum currently be shown in the signal window can be stored as a spc spectrum file SIGNAL If a spectrum was acquired it will be shown in the Signal window The axis will be adjusted automatically When complete click OK to exit the dialog and return to the Instrument Status Instrument Status RI Detectors 2300 2400 All RI detector tabs are identical independent of the features of the detector Unavailable features or functions are grayed out and inaccessible E Instrument Status i gt System Status mS 1050 amp i AS g Switching Valves j 5 2300 User Defined Detector jaa 10 1 a Run Statue HOLD Signal uRIU 0 000 Fush g Seral Fort COM 5 SH 8669 Fig 179 Instrument Status detector 2300 2400 RUN STATUS The status HOLD is displayed when no program is running other wise the RUN STATUS displays a run time in minutes elapsed from the start of the run SIGNAL The actual signal is indicated in this field The unit corresponds to the setting in the configuration FLUSH AUTOZERO The buttons FLUSH and AUTOZERO can be pressed to perform the corresponding functions The FLUSH function flushing for 1 min is deactivated during a run The AUTOZERO defines the current signal as a zero level KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 123 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Instrument
8. End 83 Lamp OFF at the end of run 81 Range from to 80 Ref 82 Reference Correction 82 Sample 82 Scale 80 81 Scan 79 83 Start 83 Store 3D data 80 Use Chn 78 Used Channel 83 Wavelength Program 79 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 199 Index Wavelength program 81 83 Dad Detector Channels Initial Wavelengths 78 Data Bits Detector 35 RF 20A Axs 36 Data File Virtual detector 88 Delete Autosampler 96 97 100 101 Delete Line Autosampler 104 Detctor Used Channel 74 Detector Acquire 3D data 75 Acquisition channel on 70 Additional Information 34 Advanced 75 At the end of run 75 Autozero at start 74 Autozero at WL change 75 Baud Rate 35 Channel 76 Channels 34 Configuration Configuration Detector 28 Connections 39 Data Bits 35 Detector Type 33 End 75 Flow Cell 35 Halogen Lamp 35 Height 76 Instrument Setup 70 Instrument Status Direct Control 75 Interface 33 Interpolate Peak Profile After Scan 76 LAN 34 Leak Sensor Sensitivity 35 More 34 Name 33 Parity 35 Port Settings 35 RS 232 33 Run Time 70 71 Sampling rate 70 Scan 75 Scan if a peak is detected 76 Serial Number 34 Serial Port 33 KNAUER Shutter Control 35 Slope 76 Start 75 Stop Bits 35 Wavelength Program 74 Wavelength toggle mode 74 Y Axis 35 Detector Type Detector 33 Device Assistant 92 Device ID Optimas 51 Device number InterfaceBox 55 Manager 55 User Defined Detector 37 D
9. only T 1 The valid range is 0 100 The sensitivity depends on the entered level a smaller value represents a lower sensitivity LEAK SENSOR SENS only CT 2 1 Select the Leak sensor s sensitivity in accordance with your requirements The choices are OFF Low MEDIUM and HIGH Configuration Flowmeter Select the flowmeter in the Configured Modules window double click the icon and complete the configuration dialog box GJC Flowmeter Configuration Name GJIC Flowmeter Serial Humber Serial Port COM 1 fatsis Units ml min Cancel Help Fig 77 GJC Flowmeter configuration window Bronkhorst Flowmeter Configuration Name Bronkhorst Flowmeter Capacity Mode Volume Flows ki Serial Number Capacity Limit 30 0 Serial Fort cOM 1 Axis Units ml min A Please adjust the Capacity Limit after changing the Capacity Mode or the Axis Units Cancel Help Fig 78 Bronkhorst Flowmeter configuration window NAME Enter a descriptive name for the flowmeter This name will appear on the flowmeter tab when the instrument setup or status windows are displayed Use a name which is unique within the instrument SERIAL NUMBER Type in the serial number of the flowmeter you are using SERIAL PORT Select the number for the communication port on the PC to which the flowmeter is connected Y AXIS UNITS GPC Flowmeter only The y axis units are given in ml min CAPACITY MODE Bronkhorst F
10. 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 194 Table of Figures Advanced Runtime Settings System wake up date setting 144 Advanced Runtime Settings Trace name changes 144 Validation of integration dialog window 145 Validation of integration dialog window real chromatogram 146 Validation of integration attempt with manual integration fixes 146 Validation of integration with baseline drift 147 Error MESSAGE ho ria Ge cede FC Set iana peGann een etek ene 147 Validation report reference chromatogram 148 Validation report Gaussian trace 2 ee eee eee 149 Instrument selection Window 2 eee eee eee eee 150 Instrument configuration window example Jasco FP 920 150 Instrument setup programming window example Jasco FP 920 151 Instrument setup programming window example Jasco FP 920 151 Instrument status tab example Jasco FP 920 151 Fraction collector selection window 2 ee eee 153 Fraction collector S 3050 configuration window 153 Fraction collector Foxy R1 configuration window 154 Tubing parameters setup eee ee ee ee eee 156 Solvent Peak Rec
11. After closing the window the parameter will be designated as L FC Parameters at 0 00 min Signal ame Relative to previous event min D Ascending Use as reference for correction of next events Signal Level Unita 0 Action Expected interval min 7 0 1 Action Waste Please notice that the parameters will next position 0 be used in the Units selected for the Detection Channel Cancel Fig 244 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Signal Level Parameters FC Parameters at 0 00 min Signal aie Relative to previous event mint 0 Ascending Descending Use as reference for correction of nest events Signal Level Unita 0 Action Expected interval min 0 1 Acton Waste Please notice that the parameters will i Collect To be used in the Units selected for the Peak Recycling Detection Channel Solvent Recycling None Collect Slices Cancel Fig 245 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Signal Level Parameters The red displayed warning message for possible event overlapping must not be a reason to change the event programming but at least to check it It may hap pen that one event cannot become active In case of PEAK RECOGNITION mode and event SIGNAL LEVEL the parameter window requires to define the PEAK BEG LEVEL peak start condition and PEAK END LEVEL peak stop condition for the fractionation Additional the condition for the sol
12. InstrN ame Value COM1 Traces Signal traceN ame Type outputsU nits YAsisMult Description Communication port Cancel Help Fig 216 Instrument configuration window example Jasco FP 920 These configuration windows are strongly dependent on the given type of instrument Some settings are fixed And will appear grayed out with no access The setup programming is done using a script language as demonstrated below The upper part of the window is for the programming inputs whereas the lower part gives the instrument specific programming information e g the allowed ranges for different parameters Before any program is saved it is KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 151 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options checked for its correctness If this check fails you will get a corresponding error message f Jasco FP 920 Method untitled met Data None Project Default Instrument Setup EE File Edit View Method Data Sequence Analysis Control Reports Window Help 8 x S amp fA amp 1 Fluorescence v K e a u gt a e X amp J s1000 J FP 920 x Aux Traces pE Trigger Instrument control script which will be executed during the method run WavelengthEX 240 nm WavelengthEM 400 nm Gain 1 FilterRC Standard Use one of Filter FilterDigital 3 sec Attenuation 1 Acquisition Fluorescence DataRate 10 Hz 0 0 Wavelengt
13. KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 97 Creating an Instrument Control Method Note The aspirate and dispense speed depends on the selected syringe and syringe speed The reagents and transport solvent are located at the following positions on the tray Transport solvent vial 85 Reagent A vial 86 Reagent B vial 87 Mix According the number of MIx TIMES 1 9 times the programmed AMOUNT ul max the syringe volume will be aspirated and dispensed If no destina tion vial is used the mixing step is performed in the sample vial Amount ul D bliss times 1 Fig 135 Autosampler Mix Method step Mix WaIT Wait a programmed period of time x xx xx 0 00 00 9 59 59 before continuing with the next step reaction time Wait 0 h O mn sec Fig 136 Autosampler Mix Method step Wait COMMIT Click the ComMmIT button to complete the operation DELETE Click the DELETE button to delete the selected step When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument setup Instrument Setup Autosampler 3950 Alias AS 1 The available settings for 3950 and AS 1 autosamplers are identical and will be described together in this section T Instrument Setup oe 5 3950 AL Aux Traces Syringe speed Normal w V Air segment Full loop gt Partial loopfill Flush volume pl 30 v Headspace pressure ul pick up wash times 2 V Needle wash Needle
14. NEXT to inject from the vial number lt n 1 gt from the previous injection or CUSTOM to select the vial number INJECTION VOLUME ul Select the desired injection volume Note that the volume depends on the selected injection mode of the autosampler in the instrument setup SAMPLE PREPARATION TIME min Define the time before the injection time the autosampler should start with the sample injection preparation Please make sure that the time is sufficient to prepare the injection before the injection time arrives otherwise the injection may be delayed If the autosampler is ready to inject it will wait until the programmed time for the stacked injection If the autosampler needs a longer time than programmed it will inject immediately after the injection preparation is finished In this case the next stacked injection will be delayed by this extra time TIME BETWEEN INJECTIONS min Enter the time between the injections DO NOT WASH NEEDLE BETWEEN INJECTIONS FROM SAME VIAL Enable this option if you wish to prohibit the needle wash after each injection programmed in the autosamplers instrument setup for the stacked injections from the same vial If you close the Stacked Injections window with APPLY the selected settings will be copied into the Stacked injections table Any existing entries from previous programming will be deleted By clicking on the right mouse button in the table you can select KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manu
15. a button The pump configuration window will open Please configure the pump according to the pump configuration described in the appropriate chapter Note that you cannot configure the same pump as for the eluents However it is not possible to use e g one channel of an LPG solvent pump for the injection module Also configure the valve as described in the appropriate chapter The injection module is not supported in the AZURA ASM 2 1L but the pump and valve of an ASM can be configured manually in the injection module The installed device in the ASM 2 1L have own IP ports which allows for separate control To use an ASM pump or valve in the injection module select the appropriate pump or valve model in the Injection Module configuration and enter manually the serial number of the ASM 2 1L device This will make sure that the devices also will be found if the ASM will receive a diferent IP address Now change the IP port for the modules pump and valve If the ASM 2 1L has IP port 10001 the module installed on the left side has IP port 10002 the mid dle module 10003 and the module installed on the right handed side the IP port 10004 If the IP port of the ASM 2 1L has been changed in the ASM s own setup the IP ports of the build in modules will be changed automatically they will always have the next possible IP ports However before you enter the IP ports of the pump and valve please check for the IP port of the used ASM 2 1L device
16. desired device from the shown list Configuration information such as LOOP TUBING and SYRINGE VOLUME as well as the tray will be added with the default set tings Please check that these settings match the installed options and correct where necessary All configuration data will be downloaded into the autosam pler if the instrument will be opened later Optionally you can enter the IP address of your device as long as the option Use S N TO IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT is disabled Please note that in case the device receives the IP address from a DHCP server e g a router the IP address may change if the device is switched off and switched on again Obtained using S M Use S N to identify the instrument Fig 62 LAN interface dialog Note It is highly recommended not to connect more than one autosam pler 3950 or AS 1 in a network Several autosamplers of the men tioned type will disrupt communication Loop VOLUME Enter the volume of the installed loop in ul If the Prep mode option is checked only available for autosampler 3950 the loop volume is fixed to 10000 ul KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 48 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems TUBING VOLUME Type in volume of the installed needle and tubing in ul The valid range is O 999 ul If the original tube is installed you can find the tubing volume on a label on the tube SYRINGE VOLUME The firmware of the AS 1 supports a syringe volume of 2
17. vent recycling can be set The ACTION options are limited to COLLECT To and CoOL LECT SLICES If the ACTION option COLLECT SLICES is selected the fraction vial position is fixed to NEXT because the PEAK RECOGNITION mode allows for defin ing the collection conditions for a time frame which can includes several peaks KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 170 OpenLAB Preparative Option which should not collected into the same fraction vial After closing the win dow the parameter will be designated as L without leading sign FC Parameters at 0 00 min Signal Peak Beg Level Units Start Solvent recycling if signal level ts lower than Unita 0 Peak End Level Units Action Acton Collect To Please notice that the parameters will 3 next position 141 be used in the Units selected for the Detection Channel Cancel Fig 246 Fraction Collection Program Peak Recognition Signal Level Parameters EVENT When using the slope instead of the level the settings are made similarly The SIGNAL only difference is that the slope values defined as signal difference per 1 sec SLOPE are to be used as thresholds After closing the window the parameter will be designated S S both for SINGLE EVENT or PEAK RECOGNITION To prevent that the noise which normally appears with all detector signals will initiate an action the software checks the slope at several consecutive data points Due
18. 1 4 198 Index DAD Detector 78 Bw DAD Detector 82 C Capacity Limit Flowmeter 57 Capacity Mode Flowmeter 57 Channel Detector 76 Interface Box 20 M 1 20 Manager 5050 20 Channels Detector 34 Channels Initial Wavelengths DAD Detector 78 Column oven see Thermostat Column Switching Option Thermostat 56 Column Thermostat At the end of run 110 Left Valve 109 Lower Limit 110 Post Column Temp 110 Right Valve 109 Select Column 110 Temperature Safety Limits 110 Upper Limit 110 Wait before Injection 110 Wait time 110 Wait with tolerance 110 Commit Autosampler 96 97 100 101 Components Pump 27 Conductivity Monitor At the end of run 85 Config Service Pump 27 Configuration Assistant ASM 2 1L 41 Autosampler 46 Autosampler 3950 46 AutosamplerAS 1 46 Flowmeter 57 Fraction Collector 153 Interface 18 Interface Box 19 54 JetStream 55 KNAUER HPLC System 20 KNAUER Optimas 51 M 1 19 Manager 5050 54 Manager M 1 54 Miscellaneous Instruments 52 Pumps 22 Switching Valves 52 T 1 Basic 55 Thermometer 58 Thermostat T 1 55 User defined Detector 37 39 Configure box Interface Box 19 M 1 19 Manager 5050 19 Configure Valve Switching Valves 53 Constant Pressure Mode P 6 1L 24 27 Control Pressure Limits Pump 63 Cycle Time Pump 62 D DAD Detector Acquire 3D data 83 Advanced 80 82 An output 80 81 At the end of run 80 81 Autozero at WL change 80 81 Bandwidth 80 83 BW 78 Bw 82
19. 1 V Integra tor Output the data can be acquired using an A D converter such as the KNAUER Interface Box or Manager Up to four detectors can be connected to the Interface Box or Managers S 5050 M 1 The detector connections are prin cipally identical The following description for the Interface Box can also be used for the Managers S 5050 or M 1 only the connector positions may differ Always use a shielded twisted pair cable to connect each detector to the Inter face Box This minimizes electrical noise Connect the analog output lines from each detector you want to acquire data from to one of the four analog connec tions labeled ANALOG IN AN IN 1 to 4 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 40 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Note After power up allow 15 minutes for the electronics to stabilize before running samples that require sensitive measurements Relay will be used auto matically for autozero signal if a channel is selected for data acqusi sition otherwise it can eo o be directly controlled Trigger Start input 0 10 V output q Relay NO E Relay Relay NC Analog in to be con owo 1 V integrator output f OOOO 2000 2 3 nected to a detector s aa Channels 1 4 ge i 7 Made in Germany ll KNAUER C Fig 53 Cable connections to the KNAUER Inter face Box IFU 2 1 To an integrator output of a detector Trigger m i Autozero
20. 20A Axs FW 0 90 only KNAUER A D Converter IFU 2 1 Interface Box IF2 Manager S 5050 M 1 Virtual Detector BlueShadow Detector 10D BlueShadow UV Detector 40D BlueShadow UV Detector 50D WellChrom UV Detector K 2600 Assistants AZURA ASM 2 1L Thermometers SIKA MH 3710 Thermometer KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 8 General Definitions Column Thermostats Autosamplers Valve Drives Fraction collectors Flowmeters Column Thermostat CT 2 1 PLATINblue Column Thermostat T 1 PLATINblue Column Thermostat T 1 Basic Smartline Column Thermostat JetStream PLATINblue Autosampler AS 1 Autosampler 3950 Autosampler KNAUER Optimas KNAUER Valve Drives Valco VICI Valve Drives KNAUER MultiValve Fraction Collector Valco MultiValve Fraction Collector Smartline Fraction Collector S 3050 ISCO Fraction Collector Foxy R1 ISCO Fraction Collector Foxy R2 Buechi C 660 Fraction Collector LABOCOL Vario 2000 Fraction Collector LABOCOL Vario 4000 Virtual Fraction Collector Injection Module Bronkhorst Flowmeter GJC Flowmeter KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 9 Installation Installation First OpenLAB EZChrom Edition must be installed from the OpenLAB installa tion disks Please refer to the OpenLAB installation manuals on the OpenLAB Shared Services Software disk Disk 1 Once OpenLAB EE is installed install the KNAUER extensions from the separate disk If autorun is active on your c
21. 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 KNAUER installer start window cee eee eee eee 9 KNAUER installer start window 2 eee eee eee 10 Drivers to Deinstaled 22 c4aa se oS yeaa VE er oD DUN AVENS E 10 Install HPLC KNAUER System 0 0 e eee ee eee 10 AIC tab with registration for a standalone workstation and message win dow with Registration Results 0 2 eee eee eee 11 Global tab with registration for a standalone workstation and message window with Registration Results 02 0 eee 11 KNAUER HPLC System has been installed 12 SCICGCECOVICES 2435405 e eae see eae pe tebe ees 12 Stare FRC INStallauiOn cerio 4 hey BES eee Gee boa de So erey a Sis 13 OpenLAB EE License overview 20ers 14 AGGHIGENSES MENU 2 5 24 45 0 ea wh eres ae ee Beek oe 14 Select path to the license file 2 ee ee eee 14 Add licenses menu with license path 202 020s 14 OpenLAB EE Control Panel creires renti bornat ape keras 17 Selection window for interface configuration 19 Manager S 5050 configuration window 48 19 Error message for missing serial number 20 Instrument selection window 2 0 ee eee ee ee ees 21 Instrument selection window with selected items 21 Auto Configuration start window 02 eee eee 21 Example of a message to complete a confi
22. 4 vial 1 46 iz Plate process order Reagent B vial 49 96 HONE k ba i 0006006060600 80 5 a T 5 Es 4 3 2 1 1P SSGSSGOGeeo 18 OSG GSS GG6O66 18 G6606660666 O OGoocooocodo OdGoecooocoooeo OOooooooococe6 OOO OOO OOCCO Fig 65 Tray configuration autosamplers 3950 AS 1 with option Use Mix amp Dilute For ul pick up no transport vial must be chosen For the tray type 84 3 VIALS 3950 only the transport vial can be selected in the method setup for all other tray types the transport liquid will be taken from the bottle with wash solution 3950 or from the special transport liquid bottle AS 1 Note All configuration settings will be transferred to the autosampler if the instrument is opened In contrast to the other Spark manufac tured autosamplers the configuration data will not be stored per manently into the device and compared with your settings However please make sure that the configuration settings are cor rect as the device will assume your settings without verification When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument configuration icon list KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Autosam pler Config uration 51 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Configuration Autosampler KNAUER Optimas Mame Seral number Communication Device ID 60 kd Loop volume pl 100 Serial Port COM kd Tubing volume ul 15 S
23. AN IN AN PONENS DIG IN RELAY gt channel 1 la RS 232 _____ a channel 2 Ate ATTENTION lt A channel 3 MADE IN GERMANY oS Fig 54 Cable connections for Manager S 5050 or IF2 If you want your instrument to trigger the start of data acquisition or to per form an autozero you must connect the trigger signal and autozero connec tions The digital inputs and outputs used for the connections are situated on remote connectors adjacent to the Integrator Inputs Each of the remote con nectors corresponds to one of the data acquisition channels Trigger Signal Connections If you want your instrument to trigger the start of data acquisition on your OpenLAB system using the Interface Box you must connect a trigger signal KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 41 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems cable to the Interface Box The trigger signal should be connected to one of the digital input connectors on the rear panel of the Interface Box For IFU 2 1 connect one pole of the trigger cable to the connector labeled TTL IN and the other pole to the next GND connector digital ground For Interface Box IF2 and Managers S 5050 M 1 connect one pole of the trigger cable to the connector labeled DIG IN TTL and the other pole to the DIG IN GROUND connector digital ground Autozero Signal Connections If your detector has an autozero option and you want to use the feature to zer
24. Ass offset Interface IF2 IFU21 Add Info Cancel Help Fig 50 User defined detector configuration window Detector NAME Enter a descriptive name for the detector This name will appear on the Configura detector tab when the instrument setup or status windows are displayed Use a tion name which is unique within the instrument MODEL Select the model of the detector from the drop down list planned future option SERIAL NUMBER Type in the serial number of the detector you are using This is only for documentation The interface does not allow to read out the serial number INTERFACE Select the A D interface for the detector you have already configured please refer chapter KNAUER Interface Configuration on page 19 and click the button to set up the acquisition channel Acquisition channel configuration Device number 1 kd 1 Input Note that you are not allowed to select a channel which i already used K Canca Fig 51 Acquisition channel configuration window Interface DEVICE NUMBER Select the Device number to which the detector is connected Acquisition The available choices depend on the global interface configuration as channel described in the chapter KNAUER Interface Configuration on page 19 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Detector Configura tion 38 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems INPUT Select the acquisit
25. CONSTANT PRESSURE Or ISOBAR MODE in the selected pressure unit MPa bar or psi solvent composition as Comp A Comp D in only if gradient mode is con figured and digital EVENTS not for pumps P 1 S 100 10P 20P P 2 1S and P 4 1S In the first row at time 0 00 min enter the initial flow in ml min or pressure only P 2 1L P 6 1L in constant pressure or isobar mode solvent composition in only if gradient mode is configured and digital events not for pumps S 100 10P 20P P 2 1S and P 4 1S To program a parameter s change during the run add a new line with the desired time of the change and enter the desired parameters A description how to edit the program table can be found below The complete program is transferred or uploaded to the pump when you start a run Note For all time programs the minimum time step between two lines is 0 02 min except for the preparative pump P 2 1L there the mini mum time step is 0 06 minutes For the pumps P 2 1L and P 6 1L in constant pressure or isobar mode the smallest time step is 0 25 minutes KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Configur ing Events Digital Out puts 67 Creating an Instrument Control Method TIME The time represents the run time a change should be executed The for mat is min min That means that for example a time of 1 33 min represents 1 minute 20 seconds The time of the first line is fixed at 0 00 min Zero is defined a
26. Fig 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 5 6 7 8 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 190 Table of Figures Detector S 2600 configuration window ssssesssssss sss 31 Detectors S 2300 S 2400 configuration window 31 Detector K 2600 configuration window 42 32 Conductivity Monitor CM 2 1S configuration window 32 Conductivity Monitor S 2900 configuration window 32 RF 20A AXS detector configuration window 32 Detector type selection ce ee ee ee ee ee 33 Available interfaces for detectors MW 1 S 2550 S 2520 10D UVD 2 1S K 2600 CM 2 18 1 ene 33 LAN INTEMACE didlOg 4405 6a dedvn sedans doa de o ans dees eka 34 Port setting dialog box ee eee eee 35 User defined detector configuration window 37 Acquisition channel configuration window 4 37 Virtual detector configuration window 0 0e ee eee 39 Cable connections to the KNAUER Interface Box IFU 2 1 40 Cable connections for Manager S 5050 or IF2 40 Wiring example Manager S 5050 IF2 and detector 41 Assistant ASM 2 1L configuration window tab GENERAL 42 DAWN INLGH ACG gee cuacace eer naweeou dee ee oe eee See ae aoe es 43 Additional information box 0 eee e
27. KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 195 Table of Figures 169 Fraction Collection Program Peak Recognition Signal Level Parameters 170 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Signal Level Slope Parame eT EEEE ET ETET ue shee eeee eeee es 171 Fraction Collection Program Peak Recognition Signal Level Slope Pa PNEIS 2222 Soe g tes EEEE ER T SEDERE 171 Fraction Collection Program Peak Recognition Spectral Similarity Pa NELES esea a E A 172 Spectrum selection WiNdOW 0 0 eee eee ee eee eee 172 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Local Maximum Parameters LOCal MaxIMGM i4seiy ee6eariad eure ee eeuerie meus eed 173 Fraction collector setup window lower part 174 Opened chromatogram 2 cece eee eee eens 174 OPENED CHROMATOGRAM IN FRC SETUP WINDOW 00 000s e ees 175 Programming the fraction table 2 02 2 eee 175 Example for a fraction table 0 eee eee eee 176 Instrument status Fraction Collector S 3050 Monitor Direct Control 177 Instrument status Fraction Collector S 3050 Rack vi
28. OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 7 General Definitions The installer checks if the hardware and software requirements are fulfilled If the requirements are not met the installation must be confirmed The software runs after installation for 60 days with a startup license The OpenLAB Control Panel will inform about the days left The regular license must be created on a special server Please send your license authorization code and the OpenLAB computer s MAC address to KNAUER For Distributed or Networked Systems also the computer s name is required KNAUER will cre ate the license file and send it to you Please refer to the CDS_Licenselnstalla tionGuide pdf for assistance installing the license on your computer Supported Devices The following KNAUER devices are supported Pumps AZURA Pump P 2 1L AZURA Pumps P 2 1S P 4 1S AZURA Pump P 6 1L PLATINblue Pump P 1 Smartline Pump 1050 Smartline Pump 100 BlueShadow Pumps 10P 20P BlueShadow Pump 40P BlueShadow Pump 80P Detectors AZURA Detector MWD 2 1L AZURA Detector UVD 2 1L AZURA Detector UVD 2 15 AZURA Detector DAD 2 1L AZURA Detector DAD 6 1L AZURA Conductivity Monitor CM 2 15S PLATINblue Detector MW 1 PLATINblue Detector PDA 1 Smartline RI Detector S 2300 S 2400 Smartline UV Detector S 2520 Smartline UV Detector S 2550 Smartline PDA Detector S 2600 Smartline PDA Detector S 2850 Smartline Conductivity Monitor S 2900 Shimadzu Fluorescence Detector RF
29. Recycling Recycling Volumetric delay Use recycling valve ae Fixed time rnin Capillary Length crm 0 00 Peak recycling port 4 Capillary Volume cm3 0 000 Salv recycling port 5 Add Info Cancel Fig 232 Own port recycling valve setup for 6 position valve USE OWN PORTS FOR RECYCLING For use of own ports no further settings are required if the check box is selected For the MultiValve fraction collector you will find that the last two fraction ports will be used for solvent and peak recy cling and therefore the number of available ports for fractionation will be KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Interface 160 OpenLAB Preparative Option reduced by 2 Additionally the ports numbers for solvent and peak recycling will be shown It is not possible to enable only one of the recycling options or change the recycling ports numbers If you cascade valves for a higher number of fractions always the ports of the last valve will be used for recycling When completed click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the Multi Valve FC configuration NUMBER OF VALVES Enter the number of valves which make up the MultiValve fraction collector 32 valves in maximum can be cascaded independently from the numbers of port and the used communication port VIAL VOLUME ml Enter any desired vial volume the default volume is just a sug gestion However you are able to overwrite the vial v
30. Status Conductivity Monitor S 2900 CM 2 1S E Instrument Status lo System Status E3 PEILLPG ay PEIL GJ cm 215 S 52900 rs Run Statue Signal mS cm pH Temperature C aA Seral Port COM 1 SH 2 E Instrument Status EP System Status gael PEIL fa CM Run Status On Channel 1 0 0000 mcm pH 14 00 Temperature 0 0 IE Refresh GLP gt LAN 172 16 6 103 10001 a SN FLD133800003 Fig 181 Instrument Status Conductivity Monitor CM 2 1S RUN STATUS The status HOLD is displayed when no program is running other wise the Run Status displays a run time in minutes elapsed from the start of the run SIGNAL S 2900 The actual signal is indicated in this field The unit corresponds to the setting in the configuration CHANNEL 1 CM 2 15S only The actual signal in the unit which have been cho sen in the detector configuration dialog is displayed pH The actual pH value is shown Temperature The actual temperature is shown Refresh GLP CM 2 1S only This section only available with connected KNAUER detectors displays GLP Good Laboratory Practice related information transferred to or downloaded from the detector Pressing the Refresh GLP button will actualize this information The extent of the information depends on the given detector KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 124 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Note The GLP
31. The maximum data rate for a detector is only available via LAN connec tion for data acquisition and for the detectors MW 1 and 2550 for one acquisition channel KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Detector Configura tion 34 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Note For the detector S 2600 in the detector s own setup the CONTROL must be set to RS232 BINARY BAUD RATE 115200 The additional USB or LAN port is not functional Note For the detector K 2600 in the detector s own setup the CONTROL must be set to NET BAUD RATE 9600 LAN All LAN controlled devices can be added and configured automatically using the Auto Configuration button on the configuration main window In addition to this you can let the software search for your already connected and switched on device from the devices configuration window For this the option Use S N TO IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT must be enabled Click on the button to start the search for all connected LAN devices of the currently configured type If more than one is found all hits will be shown in the window Select the desired device from the shown list The software will read out the information such as serial number and will fill it automatically into the configuration screen For all KNAUER LAN devices port 10001 is selected by default Don t change this setting otherwise no communication can be established To search for an instrument the device must be conne
32. The Sensitivity can be selected from the corresponding pull down menu The choices are HIGH MED LOW GAIN The Gain can be selected from the corresponding pull down menu The choices are x1 x4 x16 RECORDER RANGE The RECORDER RANGE can be selected from the corresponding pull down menu The choices are x1 x1 2 x1 4 X1 8 1 16 1 32 1 64 x1 128 X1 256 0 mV OUTPUT MODE The OUTPUT MODE can be selected from the corresponding pull down menu The choices are EXITATION ENERGY LIGHT SOURCE CORRECTION EMISSION NOT CORRECTED Press the SET button to send the parameters to the detector AUTOZERO Activate this option to perform an autozero at the start of the diag nostic measurement Once the AUTOZERO button has been pressed the autozero is performed immediately EVENT OUT EVENT MARK EVENT OUT short circuits the event out terminal for approximately 1 second Event Mark adds an event mark to the analog output DIAGNOSTICS Click this button to use the diagnostic features of the OpenLAB software The Diagnostics window appears which allows you to access informa tion and control of important parameters and modules of the device KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Diagnostics 126 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Note The obtained diagnostic spectrum cannot be saved directly nor exported For subsequent comparisons you must take a screenshot and save this in an appropriate way Diagnost
33. The bandwidth is the wavelength range that is used to measure a data point For the spectral acquisition it is highly recommended to use a bandwidth of 1 nm Note The scan section limits Start and End are important even if no PDA option is available All of the measuring wavelengths in the Wave length Program for the used channels 1 to 4 must be within these limits ACQUIRE 3D DATA You have access to this selection field only with the PDA option WAVELENGTH PROGRAM Used channels i 2 H3 H4 Bandwidth nm Fig 118 Detector S 2600 wavelength program table USED CHANNEL Check the box es to turn the acquisition for the selected chan nel s on If the box is not selected no data will be acquired and no time pro gram will be executed for this channel As many channels are activated at least one as many wavelength columns appear in the spreadsheet below Use to check the boxes 5 to 8 BANDWIDTH The bandwidth is a measure of the range over which the calcula tions and measurements are used to calculate the intensity for a particular wavelength For example with a 10 nm bandwidth the intensity for 250 nm would be calculated from 245 nm to 255 nm A wider bandwidth results in an increased signal to noise ratio because the multiple measurements cause the random noise to be canceled out That is if KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 84 Creating an Instrument Control Method the noise is truly ran
34. The red line shows Modify the actual gradient status The yellow ones are those available for modifying KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 112 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method The Gradient Modify allows for changing the gradient table by adding new lines or freezing the gradient for a defined time COMMIT LINE To modify the gradient program enter the time for the new line and the desired values in the fields on the top of the window To change an already existing time line enter this time in the Time field and the new values Clicking on the Commit LINE button inserts the new or modified line into the gradient program The changes from one or more committed lines becomes only active send to the pump upon clicking the button SEND GRADIENT You will see then the new line s in the gradient spreadsheet As the complete gradient in the pump will be replaced with a new one the run time on the pump s display will start with time 0 00 min This will not influence the method run time DELETE LINE SEND GRADIENT To delete a line from the gradient program enter the time of the line to be deleted and click the DELETE LINE and then click the SEND GRADIENT button FREEZE GRADIENT You can also freeze the current gradient status for a time you have entered by clicking the FREEZE GRADIENT button Due to that you cannot setup a time for the action This will extend the pump table and therefore also the pump
35. UV detector is configured Sashes a E vents O00 laal Apply Pump Purge gt lal Uw Diagnostics gt al Fig 192 ASM2 1L status tab System with UV Diagnostics EVENTS Status The three digits show how the events have been set in the Events Digital Output Control menu This may not be the current status of the Events if these settings have not been sent by clicking the Apply button The current status of the events will be represented by the LED symbols on the top of the ASM 2 1L status window Click on the button to setup the events digital outputs Refer to the section Configuring Digital Outputs for details Click on the lt Apply gt button to send the settings to the device UV DIAGNOSTICS gt Click on the button to open the UV diagnostics window Please refer to the UV detectors status chapter page 115 for more information KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 133 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method PumP PURGE gt Click on the button to open the purge setup window Please refer to the appropriate chapter page 114 for more information GLP The GLP section of the ASM 2 1L status window allows the GLP data of all modules of the ASM 2 1L to be read out Note The GLP information will not saved Get GLP Information Instrument data Serial number FY A12 1400002 Firmware version 1 05 Firmware subversion 003 Instrument installation date 01 0
36. a reminder that the autozero will take place at any wavelength change during a run HPG PRESSURE LIMITS UNIT only for pump P 4 1S This section is only accessi ble if a pump P 4 1S or two pumps as a HPG including a pump P 4 1S HPG KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 92 Creating an Instrument Control Method have been configured The shown pressure unit depends on the unit selected in the pump configuration MPa bar psi MIN Enter the minimum pressure allowable for your pump The zero setting disables the shut down due to minimum pressure MAx Enter the maximum pressure allowable for your pump The default value always corresponds to the configured pump head A setting above this value is not allowed If the MIN and MAXx limit are set to 0 the software will not check the pressure and the limits will only be monitored by the pump internally OPTIONS The settings accessible in this section depend on the configured mod ules STANDBY AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option the Assistant will switch into standby after the run time has elapsed The pump motor and the detector lamp will be switched off and the Assistant s display will show the Standby sta tus If this option is selected all other options of the Options section become inaccessible FLOW OFF AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option the flow will be set to zero after the run time has elapsed LAMP S OFF AT THE END OF RU
37. an Instrument Control Method Detector EXT TRIGGER ON IN 0 00 MIN AFTER READY Check this option to use a logical trig Instrument ger signal for starting the system This allows a synchronous system start with Setup out an external trigger source e g autosampler or manual injection valve With 0 00 MIN AFTER READY the system will be started if all connected devices have sent a ready to the software For a delayed start enter the desired time ARGUMENT X Y X and Y are optional arguments Use of these can be switched off A resulting formula can be calculated without either X nor Y with only X or with both X and Y single Y is forbidden If X or X and Y are switched on X and Y signs must be used in the resulting formula expression Source After checking the field ARGUMENT X or Y the drop down menu of the SOURCE becomes accessible The options are TIME DATA FILE and EXTERNAL SOURCE Source TIME With this selection no further settings for ARGUMENT X or Y are possible The argument value is equal to the current time value DATA FILE Load an already existing chromatogram data file that should be shown starting a run with the virtual detector The value of this argument is calculated using the corresponding point in the selected data file The speed of the data acquisition can be set with the SAMPLING RATE If the original chromato gram was acquired for 10 min with 1 Hz the chromatogram will be finished within 5 min if the sampling
38. and send it to you Please find on the KNAUER labelled CD OpenLAB CDS KNAUER Instrument Drivers a PDF form License Account Information which includes all required information Please open the PDF form with an accordingly program and send it to KNAUER With the Adobe Reader you cannot store the filled form as a PDF In this case please use the txt file and fill it with a text editor program This license is bound to the network adapter Once Windows has to be rein stalled on your computer no new license has to be created The existing license file can be used for the same computer again KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 14 Installation Install Licenses for OpenLAB EE 1 To install the license click ADMINISTRATION LICENSES ADD Agilent OpenLAB Control Panel gt G Change Copy MAC Save MAC Get Server Address Address License Licensing iis x License Server f f The license server and its default MAC address are shown below Click Change Server to use a different license server Links Name localhost MAC Address 001129425673 Licenses Inst yntrollers To view all valid MAC addresses for the configured license server run the Get MAC Address utility To do this login to the license server computer click the Start menu and select Get MAC Address from the All Programs Agilent Technologies OpenLABS group Licenses Your startup licen
39. are fixed and given in Hz data points per sec ond For reproducible area calculations as well as for peak recognition for the KNAUER fraction collection option more than 20 data points per peak are rec ommended The peak width can be used for determining the optimal sampling rate For example for a peak with a 20 seconds peak width from peak start to peak end a data rate of 2 Hz is recommended For each selected sampling rate the narrowest peak width will be shown for which this sampling rate will be adequate Samplings rates range between 1 to 200 Hz depending on the detector type and can be selected from the drop down menu For some detectors the maxi mum data rate Is only available when the device is connected via LAN and in case of some multi channel detectors only one channel is used for the data acquisition RUN TIME RUN TIME determines the length of time data will be sampled KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 71 Creating an Instrument Control Method ACQUISITION DELAY ACQUISITION DELAY is the interval between the start of the run Trigger and the time when sampling starts for this detector Note If the detector lamp is disabled the event outputs cannot be con trolled and will remain in the last set status Instrument Setup RI Detectors S 2300 S 2400 E Instrument Setup feel EJ 5 2300 5 2400 ERS Trigger V Acquisition channel on Options Time constant 10 Sec vZ
40. button will send the flow entered into the FLOW field to the pump The option to send a pressure is only available for pump P 6 1L if the option USE CONSTANT PRESSURE MODE in the configuration is enabled FLOW amp GRADIENT APPLY Pressing this button will send the current flow and gra dient settings to the pump GRADIENT COMPONENTS Specify the composition A B and click the GRADIENT APPLY button The components field is applicable for the HPG High Pressure Gradient or LPG Low Pressure Gradient mode Depending on how many components are configured the corresponding number of fields A B will be accessible GRADIENT APPLY Pressing this button will send the current gradient setting to the pump GRADIENT MODIFY The GRADIENT Mopiry button is active only during a run Click ing on it opens the following window Set New Gradient Modify the running time program current run time 0 31 min Time 0 00 Flow 0 000 4 100 6 O ac O ZD Commit Line Delete Line Enter the new gradient line in the form Time min Flow ml min A 2 B C 2D Send Gradient Freeze the current gradient for 0 00 min vill be performed immediately Freeze Gradient IF the run time i to be extended use Control Extend run from the menu Hold Purp Gradient Time min Fig 167 Gradient Modify Set new Gradient window Gradient In the gradient spreadsheet the elapsed lines are grayed
41. channel of the interface in use Note It is not possible to use the cinch RCA connector and the remote connector from the same channel for different instruments They are not independent of each other When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument configuration icon list Configuration Thermostat T 1 T 1 Basic JetStream CT 2 1 Select the desired thermostat in the Configured Modules window double click the icon and complete the configuration dialog box The Smartline Column Thermostat is supported as JetStream Azura Thermostat CT2 1 Configuration Name Interace LAN k H Serial Number Obtained using S H A IP Port 10001 Temp Units C ka Use S N to identify the instrument Leak Sensor Seng Low Cancel Help Fig 72 Thermostat CT 2 1 configuration window PLATINblue Thermostat T 1 Basic Confiqurati Mame T 1 Basic Mame JetStream Oven Interface COMI Interface COMI Serial Humber Serial Humber Cancel Help Cancel Help Fig 73 Thermostat T 1 Basic and Jetstream configuration window 7 PLATINblue Thermostat T 1 Configuration Name ya Left Valve None h Serial Number Right Valve None 5 Interface LAN v J Temp Units C 4 Obtained using S N Column Switching Option IP Port 10001 v Post Column Cooling Vi Use S N to identify the instrument V Leak Sensor Level 6 OK Canc
42. described in the chapter CREATING PUMP PROGRAM KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 109 Creating an Instrument Control Method Note Make sure that the column ovens CT 2 1 and JetStream are switched on before opening the instrument window If the keypad is connected it must display Choose Function so that connection may be established A software control is also possible without key pad Valves Program Profile Valves Program Profile Fig 153 Instrument Setup column oven JetStream Fig 154 Instrument Setup column oven T 1 with valves LEFT VALVE RIGHT VALVE LEFT RIGHT VALVE only T 1 If your T 1 is equipped with switching valves the valve columns are visible The number of positions depend on the valve type defined in the instrument configuration If the col umn switching option in the configuration is enabled only one column LEFT RIGHT VALVE is accessible If a position is defined both valves will be switched to the selected position at the same time If you use it for column switching KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 110 Creating an Instrument Control Method please make sure that the columns are connected to the same position on both valves WAIT BEFORE INJECTION Enable this option if you wish your system equilibrate with the initial temperature for a certain time WAIT WITH TOLERANCE C The system will wait until the set temperature is reached within the
43. description in the detector s manual can not be applied Before you launch the OpenLAB instrument you must switch the detector in to serial mode RF 20A Axs Press the function key FUNC until the display shows SYSTEM _ ENTER TO SELECT Press the ENTER key Press function key until the display shows RS 232 PARAM _ ENTER TO SELECT Press the ENTER key Now the settings for the serial interface can be reviewed and modified if necessary To move to the next parameter press the function key BAUD RATE 9600 DATA BITs 8 Parity 2 means even STOP BITS 1 Note The COM settings here and in the software must be identical If e g the parity is set to 2 means even parity it must be set in the detector s setup as well in the software Once all parameters have been reviewed the display shows RS 232C_ENTER TO ENABLE Press the key ENTER The display shows RS 232C_ENABLE for approxi mately 2 seconds then the default screen is shown Now the detector is in serial control mode and can be controlled by software If the detector is switched off and on again it will start again in RS 232 control mode During the boot procedure the RS 232 control mode will be shown very shortly on the display To switch off the RS 232 control mode the keys CE und DEL must be pressed at the same time Note The driver for the model RF 20A Axs only supports the firmware version 0 90 This firmware is only available through KNAUER The control n
44. double clicking on each or by clicking once on the icon followed by the green arrow z KNAUER HPLC System Available modules Configured modules E Assistant ASM2 1L a E7 Pump P2 1L 9 Pump P6 1L 9 Detector UYD2 1L PLATINblue Pump P 1 amp PLATINblue Autosampler AS 1 PLATINblue Detector Mw 1 J PLATINblue Detector PDA 1 PLATINblue Thermostat T 1 i PLATINblue Thermostat T 1 Basic ee J Pump 1050 g Pump 10P 20P 7 P2 15 7 P4 15 Pumos 100 0 4 Options Auto Configuration Cancel Help d Fig 19 Instrument selection window with selected items AUTO CONFIGURATION Using the AUTO CONFIGURATION button all devices con nected via LAN and switched on will be automatically added and configured Auto Configuration Knauer LC System Auto Configuration only LAN capable devices will be detected Interface LAty IP Port 10001 Cancel Help Fig 20 Auto Configuration start window All KNAUER devices use a single IP port for LAN communication Only devices with the same IP port as selected in the Auto Configuration window will be KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 22 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems found The default IP address is 10001 It can be changed manually in the device s setup We recommend reviewing the configuration of all automatically added devices Devices connected via RS 232 serial connection wil
45. for recycling 157 Solvent Pump 63 Solvent Type Pump 64 Source Virtual detector 88 SSV Autosampler 3950 48 Stacked Inj Autosampler 104 Stacked injections Autosampler 102 Start DAD Detector 83 Detector 75 Start sample preparation Autosampler 102 Stop Bits Detector 35 RF 20A Axs 36 Stop Events at Time Autosampler 96 Store 3D data DAD Detector 80 Switching Valve Pretreatment 107 Switching Valves Add Info 54 Add Valve Info 54 Configuration 52 Configure Valve 53 Instrument Setup 106 Interface 53 LAN 53 RS 232 53 Valve Name 53 Valve Type 53 Valves Number 53 Syringe Speed Autosampler 94 98 Syringe Volume Autosampler 3950 48 Optimas 51 T T 1 Instrument Setup 108 T 1 Basic Configuration 55 Instrument Setup 108 Temperature control Autosampler 95 99 Temperature Safety Limits Column Thermostat 110 Thermometer Address 58 Configuration 58 Name 58 Serial Number 58 Serial Port 58 Thermostat Column Switching Option 56 Interface 56 LAN 56 Leak Sensor Level 57 Leak Sensor Sens 57 Left Valve 56 Name 55 Post Column Cooling 56 Right Valve 56 RS 232 56 Serial Number 56 Thermostat T 1 Configuration 55 Time Assistant 92 Fluorescence Detector 86 Virtual detector 88 Time between Injections Autosampler 103 Time Constant Dtector 70 Time constant Assistant 91 Time program Assistant 92 Timed Events KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 206 Index Autosampler 95 99 Timed events
46. fraction collector modules are only avail able the FRC Add on is installed Double click the icon and complete the configuration dialog box Switching Valves Configuration Valves number Add Info Configure valve Valve name Valve 1 Interface RS 232 x lal Seral number COM Fort com Valve type i Baud Aate 9600 Add Valve Info Cancel Help Fig 68 Switching Valves configuration window VALVES NUMBER Enter the number of valves used in a group In maximum 32 valves can be configured in this configuration window CONFIGURE VALVE Select the number of the valve you would like to configure You must configure all of the valves Valves number before leaving the dialog box VALVE NAME Enter a descriptive name for the selected valve This name will appear on the valves tab when the instrument setup or status windows are dis played Use a name which is unique within the instrument VALVE TYPE Select the type of the valve from the drop down list The choices are 2 6 12 and 16 POSITIONS and for the Valco VICI valves additionally 8 and 1 O POSITIONS INTERFACE Select the INTERFACE you want to use for communication with the device AS 232 LNO g al Fig 69 Available interfaces KNAUER Switching Valves RS 232 Select the number for the RS 232 communication port COM Port on the PC to which the valve is connected LAN KNAUER Switching Valves only Obtained using S M
47. from the ASM configuration If all ASM modules will be controlled separately the ASM must be removed from the configuration Configuration Autosampler For each system only one autosampler will be accepted Select the autosampler in the Configured Modules window double click the icon and complete the configuration dialog box For the configuration of the Injection Module please refer the FRC section chapter STACKED INJECTIONS Configuration Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Autosampler 3950 Configuration Name 5 3950 Serial number Interface RS 232 z Loop volume fpl 100 COM Por COM1 nA Baud Rate 9600 z Tubing volume pl 15 Syringe volume pl 500 z Options Tray thermostating Prep mode 170 Tray SSY Fig 60 Autosampler 3950 configuration window The autosamplers 3950 and AS 1 are based upon on the same device but have some different features as that they address different application areas How ever the configuration will be explained in the same chapter you will find a note if a feature is not available for both devices Please note that the model 3950 can either have a RS 232 or LAN interface for communication only one of them the model AS 1 is delivered only with a LAN interface NAME Enter a descriptive name for the autosampler This name will appear on the autosampler ta
48. is important for setting up the method as well as the instrument sta tus during the run Here only the setup aspects shall be described If you have performed at least one run with the method the last recorded chromatogram will be displayed Independent of this you can load any already stored chromatogram in this area to use it for the fractionation SELECT OPEN DATA and then the desired chromatogram This will open the usual chromatogram view E Channel A Time 8 75913 Minutes Amplitude 0 00046 volts Fig 253 Opened chromatogram Going back to the setup window the chromatogram will also appear there Moving the cursor inside the graph area it becomes a cross hair and addition KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 175 OpenLAB Preparative Option ally a vertical line appears Depending on the position the actual values Time Amplitude level and Slope will be displayed directly above the graph Time 8 48 min Amplitude 0 042 Slope 0 007 Fig 254 OPENED CHROMATOGRAM IN FRC SETUP WINDOW If you have already acquired a chromatogram with your sample the setup of the FRC table is very easy You can escape the parameters LEVEL and SLOPE directly from the chromatogram Move the cursor to the desired position e g to the start of a peak you will collect and double click with pressed Control lt CTRL gt key In the fraction collection program a new line is created and the parameter windo
49. is located DELETE LINES This command deletes the selected lines in the spreadsheet All the above listed commands are available for all time tables independently of the device type For pumps the lines below additionally are available IMPORT GRADIENT The KNAUER UHPLC Method Converter can create a gradient table which can be imported into OpenLAB CDS EE If you select the option a window will open to select the file with the desired gradient table KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Create Step Gradient Configur ing Pump Program Action at the end of run 69 Creating an Instrument Control Method CREATE STEP GRADIENT Several prepared gradients can be selected Create Gradient Dialog Gradient Settings Gradient Type 0 5 10 50 90 95 100 ha Components AJB g Flow ml min 1 000 Step Duration min 5 00 Step Transition min 0 02 Fig 97 Create Gradient Dialog GRADIENT TYPE Select the Gradient Type MODE Select Ascending Descending or Full COMPONENTS Select A B or C D Flow ml min The flow must be within the range of the pump head STEP DURATION MIN Time step between two gradient steps STEP TRANSITION MIN Time range for executing the gradient step The smallest time step is 0 02 min only P 2 1L 0 06 min The flow and gradient composition profile is displayed in the profile window area below the spreadsheet Note For the HPG mode the changes made
50. logical and and or combinations LOCAL MAXIMUM The action is started by a local maximum LOCAL Minimum The action is started by a local minimum SPECTRAL SIMILARITY The action takes place according to set similarity thresholds in the PARAMETERS setup EXP INTERV MIN Expected time Here the value entered in the PARAMETERS setup will be shown REL TIME SHIFT MIN Relative time shift Here the value calculated in the PARAME TERS setup using the USE AS REFERENCE FOR CORRECTION NEXT EVENTS option will be shown PARAMETERS Activating any field in this column an arrow appears Clicking on that a dialog box for the FC parameters at the given time will be opened Its appearance depends on the mode as well as on the selected event KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Parameters EVENT UNCONDI TIONAL 167 OpenLAB Preparative Option FC Parameters at 0 00 min Signal i l Relative to previous event min Unconditional T _ Use as reference for correction of next events Action Expected interval min 0 Eta Collect Ta nest position 1 41 Cancel Fig 241 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Unconditional Parameters FC Parameters at 10 00 min ana Relative to previous event min 0 Unconditional I C Use as reference for correction of nest events Action Expected interval min 0 Aeta comet Waste Collect To Peak Recycling Solve
51. loop is filled with the sample The default value is 30 ul for a tube volume of 15 ul The preflush will only be carried out for the injection modes FULL LOOP and PARTIAL LOOPFILL In the flushed loop mode this option is deactivated Note Flush volumes smaller than twice the volume of the needle and tub ing will result in a decrease of performance of the autosampler KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Timed Events 99 Creating an Instrument Control Method WASH TIMES Select the Wash times in number of syringe volumes The valid Interval is between 1 and 9 Note that the Needle Wash check box must be selected in order to activate this setting NEEDLE HEIGHT Select the penetration depth of the needle or the distance between the vial bottom and the needle tip The valid settings are between 2 and 6 mm with the step 1 mm AIR SEGMENT Check the Air Segment box to enable the use of an air segment between the sample and the wash solvent to reduce the amount of flush vol ume HEADSPACE PRESSURE Check the Headspace Pressure box to enable the use of headspace pressure in combination with the syringe to transport sample to the loop The compressor will always be used during a wash procedure Note The accuracy and reproducibility of the autosampler may decrease if headspace pressure is not selected NEEDLE WASH Check the Needle Wash box to enable a wash procedure TEMPERATURE CONTROL If your autosampler is equip
52. methods that are stored on the mentioned Enterprise machine Download Tab Method The actually set parameters also those not yet saved of the current instrument setup tab as well as those of the whole method can be downloaded to the cor responding instruments Select CONTROL DOWNLOAD METHOD from the main menu If the device s is are not properly connected the Instrument Activity Log will open and show the appropriate error message s The action starts the operation of devices but not the data acquisition Note In case of Download Tab only a single pump will be controlled even for an HPG system Validation of Integration This tool is a hardware independent test of the installed software package that indicates how reliable the integration of the chromatograms is performed To carry out this test select any method setup window to access the menu sequence Select the menu METHOD VALIDATION OF INTEGRATION Validation of integration x C Reference chromatogram datafile Ja file View report Gaussian sequence T Baseline Dritt 70 ose 100 Fig 208 Validation of integration dialog window The test can be carried out using either a Gaussian curve as shown in Fig 208 or a pre selected real chromatogram If you select the latter option the usual KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 146 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options chromatogram window is opened enabling the softwa
53. position valve The BLANK space means that the valve will not change its state at the given time KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 107 Creating an Instrument Control Method You can enter the settings either by typing the desired values into the corre sponding field or by selecting your choice from the drop down menu which becomes accessible via the button in the selected field For details on the spreadsheet operations refer to the section CREATING A TIME GRADIENT PROGRAM as described in the chapter CREATING PUMP PROGRAM The valves program profile will be adapted automatically to the spreadsheet inputs when you save the method If you select any field in the comment column the amp button will appear to open a comment window Cancel Fig 151 Setup window KNAUER Switching Valves Comments PRETREATMENT Checking this option the SETUP button becomes active Clicking on the SETUP button the following dialog window is opened Pretreatment Prograrn Cancel 4 wn For pretreatment zero time is considered to be the injection time Please use negative times to program the pretreatment time table Fig 152 Pretreatment setting dialog window The appearance of the valve program corresponds to that of the main valve setup window It must be edited in the same way as described above To add a new line make a right mouse click in the table and select INSERT LINE from the menu The on
54. pump and or valve drive in a method it is required to set them all with an identical earliest time line 1 All pretreatment procedures will start simultaneously Note Ifa pump should switch off after exactly 5 minutes of pretreatment include a line with 0 ml min flow into the pretreatment s pump program Otherwise the pump may run for a longer time as some seconds are needed to load the new flow rate from the method s default pump program An example for both A pump should run for exactly 5 minutes before the injection and a valve should switch 2 minutes before injection from position 2 to position 5 means 3 minutes after the pump s pretreatment is started Therefore a time table for the valve was be created which also starts at 5 minutes Here are the setup tables for both devices Pump Mae 5 04 min 1 ml min 5 04 min pos 2 0 04 min 1 ml min 2 00 min pos 5 0 02 min 0 ml min 0 00 min pos 5 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Pump Instrument Setup Configur ing Pump Program 66 Creating an Instrument Control Method The smallest time step in a table is 0 06 minutes for the pump P 2 1L for all other devices 0 02 minutes The CONSTANT PRESSURE MODE or ISOBAR MODE of the pumps P 6 1L and P 2 1L allows for running at a constant pressure with variable flow rate For P 2 1L it is a gradient option however this feature is only available for isocratic mode For the P 6 1L this is an addit
55. range defined by the tolerance value before the next injec tion is performed WAIT TIME A temperature independent delay between successive injections can be set in the field WAIT TIME The system will wait for that time after having reached the initial temperature and before the next injection is performed The wait time is also applied when a run is started and the initial temperature has already been reached also between runs in a sequence TEMPERATURE SAFETY LIMITS CT 2 1 T 1 The option TEMPERATURE SAFETY LIMITS allows for setting safety limits for the thermostat temperature from 2 85 C If the limit is reached the thermostating unit will be deactivated and the soft ware will show an appropriate error message LOWER LIMIT CT 2 1 T 1 If the lower temperature limit is reached the thermo stating unit will be deactivated UPPER LIMIT CT 2 1 T 1 If the upper temperature limit is reached the thermo stating unit will be deactivated ACTION AT THE END OF RUN CT 2 1 T 1 The choices are No Action Thermostat Off and Standby only T 1 SELECT COLUMN only T 1 If you wish to note information about the injection in the RFID chip of a compatible KNAUER column select the desired column in the drop down menu This number to be selected corresponds to the number position the column is connected on the RFID terminal strip It must not be equal to the column switching valves position POST COLUMN TEMP only T 1 The
56. s run time In the following example the gradient 100 A 0 B 0 A 100 B in 10 minutes is frozen for 2 minutes from 1 32 3 34 minutes at 1 32 minutes the freeze comman4d is sent Set New Gradient Modify the running time program curent run time 93min S SOS er ose Time 0 00 Flow 0 000 4 100 6 O ac O ZD Commit Line Delete Line Enter the new gradient line in the form Time min Flow ml min A 2 B C 2D Send Gradient Freeze the current gradient for 2 00 min vill be performed immediately Freeze Gradient IF the run time i to be extended use Control Extend run from the menu Hold Purp Gradient 7 Time rir Fig 168 Gradient modify window freeze gradient for 2 minutes entered KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Extend Run 113 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Set New Gradient Modify the running time program current run time 1 37 min Time 0 00 Flow 0 000 4 100 6 O ac O ZD Commit Line Delete Line Enter the new gradient line in the form Time min Flow ml min A 2 B C 0 Send Gradient Freeze the current gradient for 2 00 min vill be performed immediately IF the run time i to be extended use Control Extend run fram the menu Hold Purp 5 Gradient Time min Fig 169 Gradient modify window freeze gradient for 2 minutes executed The pump table now has
57. sine CH hyperbolic cosine TH hyperbolic tangent SQRT ABS RAND randomizer Constants PI 3 141592653 E e 2 71828183 Operations Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Power unary plus and minus ADVANCED Pressing this button a dialog box appears to create a time table for changing the formula during a run Advanced Settings Dialog Use Advanced Settings Fig 128 Virtual detector setup time table KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 91 Creating an Instrument Control Method Instrument Setup Assistant ASM 2 1L Due to the modular system there are a lot of possible configurations for the ASM 2 1L The setup window will look different depending on the configured modules For all possible modules the setup is described below Instrument Setup E ASM21L gt lt Aux Traces I Trigger Run time 10 0 Min Show All Lines v Acquisition delay 0 0 Min 0 00 UVD2 1S 254 i 0 00 Pump P4 1S 0 000 0 a r S Time constant 1 00 sec Sampling rate 1 Hz V Autozero at start Autozero at WL change HPG Pressure Limits MPa Min 0 0 Max 0 0 Options Standby at the End of Run Flow Off at the End of Run Pretreatment Setup Lampf s Off at the End of Run Fig 129 Instrument Setup assistant ASM 2 1L for pump valve and detector RUN TIME RUN TIME determines the run tim
58. taken into account FIXED TIME If you activate the option FIXED TIME you can enter this time delay directly This value will be valid even if the flow rate is changed In case of changing the flow rate in the method the time delay should be changed in the configuration However it is recommended to use the option CAPILLARY LENGTH or CAPILLARY LENGTH KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 156 OpenLAB Preparative Option CAPILLARY LENGTH CAPILLARY VOLUME Entering the CAPILLARY VOLUME directly or cal culating it by entering the CAPILLARY LENGTH and INNER DIAMETER the delay time will be adapted to the programmed flow rate of the method Tubing Parameters Volumetric delay OF e Fixed time min 0 00 i Capillary Length ern 9 00 Inner Diameter rmm 0 00 O Capillary Yolume em3 0 000 Fig 223 Tubing parameters setup Note The default values for the fraction vials may not meet the real vol ume of the vials you use It is in your own responsibility to enter a proper value to prevent that the vials will be overfilled When complete click OK to exit the dialog and return to the instrument setup Fraction SLV OR PEAK RECYCLING For an optional solvent and or peak recycling for most Collector fraction collectors an additional recycling valve is necessary As a recycling Configura valve only a KNAUER 6 port valve must be used The KNAUER fraction collector tions 3050 includes a va
59. the software will ask if you wish to reset the filling level of all transport vials to 8000 ul Click YES to do so or No to leave the window without a level reset Please be sure that you also fill the transport vial s because the autosampler adjusts the needle immersion depth dependent on the vials filling level If the vials are not filled the autosampler can aspirate air instead transport liquid from the transport vial The software cannot read out or set the filling level The transport vial filling level will automatically be reset when the autosampler is switched on START NEEDLE WASH Click on this button to force the autosampler to perform the needle wash Move TRAY Clicking briefly on this button will change the tray position FRONT lt gt HOME KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Monitor 136 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method The Stacked Injection table can be changed during a run To have access the option DIRECT CONTROL DURING A RUN in METHOD RUNTIME SETTINGS must be enabled Pressing button during a run will open the known Stacked Injection setup with the default values For the re programming of the Stacked injection table please refer to the instrument setup chapter of the autosampler 3950 If you click on the Apply button the new stacked injection table will be executed immediately the program will not check when the last injection was made If the DIRECT CONTROL DURING A RU
60. this chapter can be performed in the offline operation mode The instrument wizard will appear the first time you open the instrument window Its appearance depends on whether you are working in offline or online mode Instrument Wizard Test 1 Offline Instrument Wizard Test 1 Create a new method Modify the current method j Modify a method on disk A Modify a method on disk Create a sequence HAH create a SEQUENCE J Intelligent Report with Wizard Intelligent Report with Wizard ES Process 4 sequence Aun one sample Run a sequence of samples I Show at instrument startup I Show at instrument startup Fig 80 Instrument Wizard offline Fig 81 Instrument Wizard online KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 60 Creating an Instrument Control Method For details on other aspects of method development e g calibration integra tion and sequence operations please refer to the OpenLAB Data System Users Guide or the Online help Instrument Setup The instrument setup section of your method displays how the devices pumps detectors autosamplers switching valves are to be controlled and how data is to be acquired This information is entered in the INSTRUMENT SETUP window This window can be opened by clicking the button Ql of the Instrument Wizard or after exiting the wizard either the button in the upper tool bar or the menu sequence METHOD INSTRUMENT SETUP A window will a
61. using algorithms The peak shape allows checking whether the scan has been completed before the end of peak Other wise the scan also includes signals of the solvent The peak is not based on real data points Interpolated peaks may not be used for calibration or analyzing KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Detector Instrument Setup 77 Creating an Instrument Control Method Note While scanning the data acquisition of the detector is discontinu ous For accurate and reliable qualitative and quantitative results the run should be performed twice with and without scanning Don t use interpolated peaks for calibration or analyzing SCAN column in wavelength table If the option ACQUIRE 3D DATA is enabled a new column SCAN will be available in the time table If you wish to perform a time defined scan enter a new line into the table with the desired time and enable the scan by clicking the check box Please note that during a scan the measurement signal s cannot be acquired In the chromatogram you will find a plateau for the scanning time It is not allowed to enable a scan in the first and last line of the time table The time between two scan must be at least for S 2550 and MW 1 0 1 min and for K 2600 0 33 min Used Channels 4 Fig 107 Detector time based scan Instrument Setup Diode Array Detectors DAD 6 1L DAD 2 1L UV Detector MWD 2 1L The detectors DAD 6 1L and DAD 2 1L are fully functio
62. with a physical printer the colors are as selected in the Appearances menu Stacked Injection The option Stacked Injection allows to perform injections during a run As an Injection device the autosampler 3950 AS 1 or the Injection Module can be used For the configuration and instrument setup of the autosamplers 3950 and AS 1 please refer to the appropriate chapters Configuration Injection Module The injection module will be installed with the KNAUER FRC AddOn In the instrument configuration dialog select the injection module and add it to the KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 182 OpenLAB Preparative Option Configured modules Note that it is not allowed to add an autosampler and the Injection module Injection Module Configuration SERR Ini Module Use Valve Configuration Serial Number L Use Sample Loop Type of Valve positions Pump Configuration Type of Pump simi laal Dae RENEA COM Port com Baud Aate a600 mi Serial Humber Purp Head 10 mi Use simulation mode Cancel Help Fig 263 Injection module configuration window USE SAMPLE LOOP If you want to use a sample loop enable the check box USE SAMPLE LOOP TYPE OF PUMP The INJECTION MODULE consists of a pump and a KNAUER 2 position switching valve Optionally an injection loop can be used Pump S 100 S 1050 P 2 1L P 2 1S or P 4 1S can be selected Once selected click on the
63. you can enter the IP address of your device if the option USE S N To IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT is disabled Please note that if the device receives the IP address from a DHCP server for example a router the IP address may change if the device is switched off and switched on again LAN Foxy FC R1 R2 There is no option for the Foxy fraction collectors to search via LAN or read out the configuration If selected please enter the IP address of the FC The IP address must match with the IP address in the FC the Foxy FC R1 or R2 do not support LAN with DHCP The LAN communication is supported in firmware version 1 01 03 and higher If later firmware versions have a problem with LAN communication please use the RS 232 instead We found e g that with firmware versions 1 01 09 and 1 01 11 the LAN commu nication does not work properly KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fraction Collector Configura tion Tubing Parameter 155 OpenLAB Preparative Option Note Please note that the touch pad of the Foxy R1 R2 will NOT be BLOCKED if the device is controlled by software The software can not recognize inputs via the touch pad Therefore it is highly rec ommended not to use the touch pad under software control Otherwise the vial position of fractions and other information may not be stored correctly in the rack file accessible via Device Moni tor Show Rack Note The communication port of the fraction collector
64. 00 1 Version 1 4 Assistant Configura tion Gen eral 42 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Detector UVD 2 1S KNAURR valve drives with 2 6 12 and 16 positions Valco valve drives with 2 6 8 10 12 and 16 positions Configuration rules Two pumps in the same ASM 2 1L housing are only supported as HPG both pumps must have the same pump head three pumps are not supported Only one UV detector is allowed One valve drive can be used as a fraction collector if the KNAUER Fraction Collector Control FCC option is installed Cascading of fraction valves is not supported This is also applicable if the valves are installed in different ASM 2 1L housings All the devices are controlled by only one LAN port a serial control via RS 232 is not implemented Ifthe pumps are installed in different ASM 2 1L housings they cannot run in a HPG Assistant ASM2 1L Configuration General Left Device Middle Device Right Device Assistant Mame ASM2 1L Serial Humber Interace LAN X lal Obtained using M IP Fort 10001 Use S M to identify the instrument Leak Sensor Sens Medium Add Info Cancel Help Fig 56 Assistant ASM 2 1L configuration window tab GENERAL If one of the devices should not be controlled it must be removed from the ASM 2 1L configuration There is no option to disable a configured device later on in the Method Setup The configuration wi
65. 000 0000 T 9206 2 5000 1 0000 Diferente 10 0 00 0 26 0 79 1 06 2 08 0 00 1 19 0 53 o o Date Thu Dec 08 09 22 11 2011 Inspector mathias SINAES eee a Fig 214 Validation report Gaussian trace KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 150 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options Generic Drivers Generally spoken any device that supports RS 232 ASCII communication can be controlled with OpenLAB software No changes in source code of OpenLAB are required but for each device an additional driver is required The configuration of a generic device is carried out by KNAUER For each new device the newly generated driver has to be installed Once the driver is installed its icon will be present in the list of instruments for configuration KNAUER HPLC System Available modules Configured modules Assistant 45M2 1L eg Purp P2 1L ie Purop P6 1L i Detector UYD2 1L ag PLATINblue Pump P 1 gt PLATINGIue Autosampler 49 1 PLATINblue Detector Wiw J PLATINblue Detector PDA 1 i FLATINblue Thermostat T 1 i PLATINblue Thermostat T 1 Basic i Purp S 1050 E Pump 10P 20P 7 P215 7 P415 4 WW Options Auto Configuration Cancel Help Fig 215 Instrument selection window For each item on the left hand side the corresponding parameters are shown and described on the right hand side Jasco FP 920 Configuration comm Property Id Rs232Port comm Fis232Part Baudrate
66. 1 and AUX 2 can be set to Switch ON contact closure four times and four times to Switch OFF at a programmed TIME It is not possible to program the same auxiliary to ON and OFF at the same time The maximum programmable time for the time based methods is 9 h 59 min 59 sec COMMIT Click the Commit button to actualize your selection DELETE Click the Delete button to remove the selected line from the pro grammed methods The Stop Events at Time allows setting the end time of the timed events If the Stop Events at Time box is not checked the end time is equal to the analysis time the run time The maximum Stop events time is 9 h 59 min 59 sec Note If the END time exceeds the programmed run time this END time overrules the analysis time for the autosampler The next injection will be started as soon as the timed events program has finished When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument setup Mix METHODs Click the Mix Methods button to create a program of sample preparation The Mix Methods set up dialog will appear Mix program Ho Method Parameters Coramit ok Cancel Fig 139 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Mix Methods New Click the New button to add additional lines to the Mix methods Clicking the NEW button activates the method type drop down menu METHOD TYPE Clicking the New button first the method type drop down list becomes active Select the Method Type from the drop d
67. 2 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Direct Control S 1050 Pump CONTINUE in 4 20 min after run start Matthias Matthias 01 08 2013 20 42 10 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Direct Control S 1050 Pump HOLD in 4 05 min after run start Matthias Matthias 01 08 2013 20 41 35 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Direct Control S 1050 Pump CONTINUE in 3 48 min after run start Matthias Matthias 01 08 2013 20 40 47 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Direct Control S 1050 Pump HOLD in 2 68 min after run start Matthias Matthias 01 08 2013 20 39 25 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Direct Control S 1050 Gradient has been modified in 1 32 min after run start Matthias Matthias 01 08 2013 20 37 55 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Sequence Acquire and Analyze Run 1 pc pm swtest 1 Enterprise Projects WW p WW p Fig 171 Instrument Activity Log window with direct control entries CONTROL PRESSURE LIMITS This section allows you to enter the control pressure limits in the units chosen in the pump configuration The pump will automati cally shut down its operation when the measured pressure is outside the set limits MIN Enter the minimum pressure allowable for your pump MAx Enter the maximum pressure allowable for your pump APPLY Click this button to actualize the selected Min Max pressure limits EVENTS Click the button to set up the event outputs Refer to the chapter section Configuring Events for details EVENTS APPLY Click the EVENTS APPLY button to acce
68. 2 2011 05 15 23 Last service date 01 01 2008 00 00 00 Last service code 0 Device working time 203006 1 h GLP Information ValveL Valve type 12Port MPos Switching cydes 4361 GLP Information VaveM Fig 193 GLP Information ASM 2 1L with valve valve pump REFRESH GLP Click on the REFRESH button to read out the GLP information of the ASM 2 1L modules You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the GLP data The following GLP information will be shown Device ASM 2 1L Instrument data Serial number Firmware version Firmware subversion Instrument installation date Last service date Last service code Device working time in hours Pumps Pump head Pump operation time Detector Lamp operation time in hours Number of lamp ignitions Optical bandwidth in nm Light intensity I Sig at UV max Light intensity I Ref at UV max Valves Valve s for KNAUER and Valco valves Valve type number of ports and positions Switching cycles KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 134 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Instrument Status Autosampler Only one autosampler can be included in any system therefore all supported autosamplers will be explained separately without cross references Instrument Status Autosampler KNAUER Optimas E Instrument Status System Status E 51050 E AS E Switching Valves E 5 2300 E User Defined Detector y 10 1 AS Status Ready Tray T
69. 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 C Today 25 04 2013 Fig 206 Advanced Runtime Settings System wake up date setting TRACE NAME If the option TRACE NAME is enabled the wavelength of the initial line in the wavelength table becomes part of the trace name in the chromato gram window as well as in the report chromatogram channel name in run report instead of the channel name This option is valid for all detectors with a wavelength table such as UV DAD and fluorescence detectors The channel name in the channel selector will not be changed i S1050LPG_S2550_ 3950 Method S1050LPG_ 3950_ 2550 1met Data Instrument 10065 Previewdat Project Dox Test August 2012 i Ex ile Edit View Method Data Sequence Analysis File E D S A Control Reports Window Help De Be Be amp 1 52550 Chane 1v eh ai BB a SHO we 10 00 Minutes Wavelength Program Time Wave Events Fig 207 Advanced Runtime Settings Trace name changes KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 145 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options The option will only change the trace name for new chromatograms Note If enabled this option is valid for all instruments of the Enterprise it is not limited to the currently used instrument or computer That means that the trace name will include the wavelength for all instruments and therefore for all
70. 24 P 1 24 Pump 100 24 Pump 1050 24 H Halogen Lamp Detector 35 Head Pump 26 Headspace Pressure Autosampler 95 99 Height Detector 76 HPG Pressure Limits Assistant 91 I O Name Interface Box 54 Manager 54 I O S 5050 Instrument Setup 105 IF 2 Instrument Setup 105 IFU Pump Program 105 IFU 2 1 Instrument Setup 105 Injection method Autosampler 102 Injection Volume Autosampler 103 Input User Defined Detector 38 Insert Line Autosampler 104 Installation 9 instrument selection 10 Instrument Configuration 21 Control 18 Instrument Control Method Creating 59 Instrument Control Method Options 142 Download Tab 145 Generic Drivers 150 Runtime Settings 142 Instrument Setup 60 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 201 Index 10P 61 P 2 1L 61 P 2 1S 4 1S 61 P 1 61 Pump 100 61 Pump 1050 61 Instrument Status Direct Control Detector 75 Interface 33 10P 24 Assistant 43 Autosampler 3950 47 Configuration 18 Interface Box 54 Manager 54 P 2 1L 24 P 2 1S8 4 1S 24 P 1 24 Pump 100 24 Pump 1050 24 Switching Valves 53 Thermostat 56 User Defined Detector 37 Interface Box Channel 20 Configuration 19 54 Configure box 19 Device number 55 I O Name 54 Interface 54 Manufacturer and Model 20 Number of boxes 19 Output 55 Range 20 Serial number 19 Serial Port 20 Interface Configuration Manager 5050 19 Interpolate Peak Profile After Scan Detector 76 J JetStream Con
71. 4 29 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Cr Ne Fou145100002 IP Aadress Obtained using S N K Cancel Help UVO27L Channel 1 Cancel Fig 36 Detector UVD 2 1L configuration window KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 30 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Channel 1 52550 ANADSOE00024 m Cancel Fig 39 Detector S 2550 MW 1 configuration window KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 31 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Fig 41 Detectors S 2300 S 2400 configuration window KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 32 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Channel 1 P Address Obtained using S N 10001 Channel 1 msfem md Cancel 52900 COM 1 Cancel Fig 44 Conductivity Monitor S 2900 configuration window Fig 45 RF 20A AXS detector configuration window KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Detector Configura tion Interface 33 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems NAME Enter a descriptive name for the detector This name will appear on the detector tab when the instrument setup or status windows are displayed The default detector name will be suggested automatically upon selecting the detector type Note Use a name which is unique within the instrument DETECTOR TYPE For some detectors the correct model type can be selected in the configuration window Selec
72. 5 90 Instrument Setup assistant ASM 2 1L for pump valve and detector 91 Instrument Setup assistant ASM 2 1L for fractionation valve 93 Instrument Setup autosampler KNAUER Optimas 94 Autosampler KNAUER Optimas timed events 95 Autosampler KNAUER Optimas Mix Methods 96 Autosampler Mix Method step Add 0 02 eee 96 Autosampler Mix Method step Mix 02 020 eee eee 97 Autosampler Mix Method step Wait 2 4 2 97 Instrument Setup autosampler 3950 AS 1 2 06 97 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 timed events 2 020s 99 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Mix Methods 4 100 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Mix Method step Add 101 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Mix Method step Mix 101 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Mix Method step Wait 101 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Stacked Injection Table 102 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Stacked Injections Table Setup 103 Autosampler 3950 Stacked injections auxiliary traces 104 Autosampler 3950 Stacked injections trace 104 Autosampler 3950 Stacked injections instrument activity log entry 105 Instrument Setup Manager S 5050 M 1 IF2 IFU 2 1 105 Analog output profile without and with activated Step Mode 106 Instrument Setup KNAUER Switching Valves 106 Setup window KNAUER Switching Valves Comments
73. 50 ul or 500 ul The firmware verison 1 15 of the Autosampler 3950 supports a syringe volume of 250 ul and 500 ul older firmware versions only support a syring volume of 250 ul The syring volume of 1000 ul is not supported The volume of installed syringe can be set to 250 500 or 1000 ul If the Prep mode option only available for autosampler 3950 is checked the syringe volume is fixed on 2500 ul TRAY THERMOSTATING Check this box if you want to control the tray thermostat ing The desired tray temperature can be entered later as part of the instru ment setup The available temperature range depends on the device Earlier versions only allow for cooling while the later versions also allow to heat the tray SSV Solvent Selection Valve Check this box if you have a solvent selection valve installed PREP MODE 3950 only Check this box if you have the preparative instrument installed In the Prep mode the values for SYRINGE VOLUME 2500 ul and Loop VOLUME 10000 ul and the 72 VIALS TRAY TYPE are fixed The tubing volume is set to 45 ul Please check the correct volume of the tube between the needle and the injection valve on the tube s label TRAY Click the TRAY button to set up the autosampler tray Tray configuration Left tray type 12 vials First destination viak 10 i Right tray type 12 vials V Reagent A vial 23 w Cancel Plate process order Rows h V Reagent B vial C Use Mis amp Dilute HONE
74. 59942 4 0 4000 300 0000 1 6756 2 S000 1 0000 Difference 3 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 44 2 83 0 00 1 42 0 00 o a Calculated 4 400 125000 00 187997140 0 4058 1554 7 r04 225714 2 4644 1 0000 0 Expected 4 400 125000 00 18799712 0 4000 1600 0000 2 25714 2 5000 1 0000 Difference 4 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 44 2 83 0 00 1 42 0 00 o a Calculated 5 5 00 6250000 939956 00 0 4058 2429 3408 34645 2 4644 1 0000 Expected 5 5 00 62500 00 939985 60 0 4000 2500 0000 34645 2 5000 1 0000 Diferente 5 00 0 00 0 00 144 2 03 0 00 1 42 1 00 oO a Calculated E 6 00 31250 00 469964 00 0 4056 3495 2685 43571 2 4644 1 0000 Expected G 6 00 3125000 469992 50 0 4000 3600 0000 43571 2 S000 1 0000 Difference G 0 00 0 00 0 01 144 2 83 0 00 1 42 0 00 Ney Calculated T 7 Oo 15625 00 234969 00 04055 4761 6870 52500 2 4644 71 0000 Expected T 7 00 15625 00 2354996 40 0 4000 4900 0000 5 2500 2 5000 1 0000 Difference T 0 00 0 00 oo 1 44 2 02 0 00 1 42 0 00 a Calculated a 6 00 7008 OO 117268 00 0 4056 6274 9165 6 1429 2 4650 1 0009 Expected a 6 00 751200 117490 68 0 4000 6400 0000 6 1429 2 5000 1 0000 Diferente 2 0 00 0 05 1T 1 44 2 74 0 00 1 40 0 09 My Calculated g 9 00 2902 00 59550 00 04054 7386 6540 T 0357 2 4662 1 0019 Expected g 3 00 3906 00 Sor 4s s4 0 4000 8100 0000 7 0357 2 5000 1 0000 Difference 9 0 00 0 10 0 33 1 34 2 63 0 00 1 35 0 19 a Calculated 10 10 00 1948 00 291 40 00 0 4042 9791 8213 7 S256 2 4704 1 0053 Expected 10 10 00 1953 00 29372 67 0 4000 10
75. 8 Full loop 98 Headspace Pressure 95 99 Injection method 102 Injection Volume 103 Insert Line 104 Method Type 96 Method type 95 100 Mix 97 101 Mix Methods 96 100 ml Pick up 98 Needle height 99 Needle Wash 95 99 New 95 Number of Injections 103 Partial loopfill 94 98 Run Screens 95 Sample Preparation Time 103 Sample Vial 103 Stacked Inj 104 Stacked injections 102 Start sample preparation 102 Stop Events at Time 96 Syringe Speed 94 98 Temperature control 95 99 Time between Injections 103 Timed Events 95 99 Transport pos 98 Use stacked injection 102 Wait 97 101 Wait time 99 Wait with tolerance 99 Wash times 95 99 Autosampler 3950 Configuration 46 Firt Destination Vial 49 Interface 47 LAN 47 Left tray type 49 Loop Volume 47 Name 46 Plate process order 49 Prep mode 48 Reagent Vial 49 Right tray type 49 RS 232 47 Serial Number 47 SSV 48 Syring Volume 48 Tray 48 Tray thermostating 48 Tubing Volume 48 Use Mix amp Dilute 49 Autosampler AS 1 Configuration 46 Autosamplers Instrument Setup 93 Autozero at start Assistant 91 Detector 74 RI Detector 71 UV Detector 72 Autozero at WL change Assistant 91 DAD Detector 80 81 Detector 75 UV Detector 72 Autozero Signal 41 Auxiliary Traces Setting up 112 Axs Instrument Setup 85 B Bandwidth DAD Detector 80 83 Baud Rate Detector 35 RF 20A Axs 36 BW KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version
76. Assistant 43 Pump 28 User Defined Detector 38 Additional Information detector 34 Address Thermometer 58 Advanced DAD Detector 80 82 Detector 75 Virtual detector 90 Air Segment Autosampler 95 99 Alarm Buzzer Autosampler 95 An output DAD Detector 80 81 Analysis Options 22 Argument X Y Virtual Detector 88 Argument Y Virtual detector 90 AS 1 Instrument Setup 97 ASM 2 1L Instrument Setup 91 Assistant 3rd column 92 4th column 93 Acquisition delay 91 Add Into 43 At the End of Run 92 Autozero at start 91 Autozero at WL change 91 Device 92 Device Type 44 FRC Setup 93 HPG Pressure Limits 91 Interface 43 Leak Sensor Sensitivity 43 Left Device 45 Max 92 Middle Device 45 Min 92 Pretreatment 93 Right Device 45 Run time 91 Sampling rate 91 Serial Number 43 Show 92 Time 92 Time constant 91 Time program 92 Assistant ASM 2 1L Configuration 41 Assistant Name 42 At the End of Run Assistant 92 At the end of run Column Thermostat 110 Conductivity Monitor 85 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 197 Index DAD Detector 80 81 Detector 75 Fluorescence Detector 86 Pump 64 UV Detector 72 Auto Configuration 21 Autosampler ADD 96 Add 101 Air Segment 95 99 Alarm Buzzer 95 Autosampler 101 Commit 96 97 100 101 Configuration 46 Delete 96 97 100 101 Delete Line 104 Do not wash needle 103 Do not wash the needle 102 Fill Down 104 Fill Table 104 Flush Volume 94 9
77. Assistant Setup FRC Setup If a valve is configured as a fractionation valve the Assistant setup includes two tabs one for the Assistant and one for the fractionation valve Please refer to the section for detailed information for the fraction valve setup MultiValve FC page 158 Instrument Setup Assistant Setup FRC Setup Run time i i Show All Lines hd Acquisition delay 9 0 0 00 UVD2 1S 0 00 Valco Valve UVD 2 18 Time constant sec Sampling rate 1 Hz V Autozero at start Autozero at WL change Options Standby at the End of Run _ Lamp s Off at the End of Run Fig 130 Instrument Setup assistant ASM 2 1L for fractionation valve Pretreatment Instrument Setup Autosamplers A single autosampler can be included into any system therefore all supported autosamplers will be explained separately without cross references KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Autosam pler Instru ment Setup 94 Creating an Instrument Control Method Instrument Setup Autosampler KNAUER Optimas The method parameters required for automatic operation of your autosampler are included in the Method Instrument Setup Optimas tab The control parameters for the autosampler become part of your method and sequence files Instrument Setup i a i SJ AS Knauer Optimas 2X Aux Traces Injection method pringe speed Noma v V Air segment
78. Autosampler 95 Transport Pos Autosampler 101 Transport pos Autosampler 98 Tray Autosampler 3950 48 Optimas 52 Tray configuration Optimas 52 Tray cooling Prep mode Optimas 51 Tray thermostating Autosampler 3950 48 Tray Type Optimas Optimas Tray Type 52 Trigger Setting up 113 Trigger Signal 40 Tubing Volume Autosampler 3950 48 Optimas 51 Type P 2 1S 4 1S 24 Pump 10P 20P 24 U Upper Limit Column Thermostat 110 Use Chn DAD Detector 78 Use Mix amp Dilute Autosampler 3950 49 Use stacked injection Autosampler 102 Used Channel DAD Detector 83 Detector 74 User Defined Detector Add Info 38 Device Number 37 Input 38 Interface 37 Model 37 Name 37 Serial Number 37 Y Axis Multiplier 38 Y Axis Offset 38 Y Axis Units 38 User defined Detector Configuration 37 39 Instrument Setup 87 UV Detector At the end of run 72 Autozero at start 72 Autozero at WL change 72 Wavelength Program 73 UVD 2 1L Instrument Setup 71 UVD 2 1S Instrument Setup 71 V Validation of integration 145 Valve Name Switching Valves 53 Valve Type Switching Valves 53 Valves Number Switching Valves 53 Vial Type Optimas 52 Virtual Detector Argument X Y 88 Ext Trigger ON 88 Instrument Setup 87 Virtual detector Advanced 90 Argument Y 90 Data File 88 External Source 89 Resulting Formula 90 Settings 88 Shift Time 89 Source 88 Time 88 Virtual Fraction Collector Configuration 157 Peak Recycling 158 Solvent Recycling 158
79. Autozero at start Sampling rate Hz Suitable for minimum peak width at base 0 3330 Min Run time Acquisition delay Fig 100 Instrument Setup detector S 2300 S 2400 In addition to the general settings see above the S 2300 and S 2400 detec tors also support the following additional setting AUTOZERO AT START Check the Autozero field if you wish the signal to be zeroed at the moment a measurement is started to define the current signal as the baseline Note You should switch on the detector about 1 hour before you start the next working session for lamp and temperature stabilization Instrument Setup UV Detectors UVD 2 1L UVD 2 1S 10D S 2520 The AZURA detector MWD 2 1L has the same technical base as the DAD 2 1L The setup beside the options for 3D data acquisition are identical with the setup for the DAD 2 1L Therefore the instrument setup for the MWD 2 1L is described in the chapter Instrument Setup Dioede Array Detectors DAD 6 1L DAD 2 1L UV detector MWD 2 1L KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Detector Instrument Setup Action at the end of run 72 Creating an Instrument Control Method In addition to the general settings see above the AZURA detectors UVD 2 1L and UVD 2 1S BlueShadow 10D and Smartline S 2520 detectors also support the following additional settings A Instrument Setup gt eE g UV 10D S UVD21L g uvo 215 S s 2520 R Trigger Ti
80. CONTROL The direct control option must be activated see Fig 203 on page 142 D2 LAMP The On state of the lamp s is represented by a green active LED sym bol the Off state is represented by an inactive gray LED symbol _ LAMP OFF LAMP ON Clicking on the LamP OFF button will after confirmation switch the lamp off and change the button label to Lamp ON The appearance KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Diagnostics 120 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method of the Hal lamp control depends on the individual detector and its configura tion Note After power up allow 30 minutes for the lamp to stabilize before running samples that may require sensitive measurements AUTOZERO Click this button to define the current signal over the specified spec trum as the baseline zero level DIGITAL CHANNELS The number of accessible channels depends on the selected number of wavelengths in the instrument configuration WL APPLY Pressing the WL APPLY sends the entered wavelength s to the detec tor EVENTS Digital Outputs Click the button to set up the digital outputs Refer to the section Configuring Digital Outputs for details EVENTS APPLY Click the EVENTS APPLY button to accept the settings INFO Click this button to display the device specific data in the detector infor mation tab DIAGNOSTICS Click this button to use the diagnostic features of the OpenLAB software
81. D from the corresponding drop down menus KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 127 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method RECORDER RANGE ANALOG OUTPUT An ANALOG OUTPUT can be activated The RECORDER RANGE is combined with this option You can define this range by selecting one from the drop down menu Autozero Activate this option to perform an autozero at the start of the diag nostic measurement Once the AUTOZERO button has been pressed the autozero is performed immediately LAMP ON LAMP OFF Clicking on the Lamp Off button will after confirmation switch the lamp off a click on the Lamp On button will switch it on Instrument Status User defined Detector The detector status tab of a User defined Detector displays only the monitor area No direct control is possible E Instrument Status System Status E 5 1050 5 as GI Switching Valves E 2300 S User Defined Detector y 10 1 Run Status Signal rm g Interface IF2IFU2 1 Device 1 at COMB l S N 103021 Version 1 05 Fig 185 Instrument Status user defined detector RUN STATUS The status HOLD is displayed when no program is running other wise the Run Status displays a run time in minutes elapsed from the start of the run SIGNAL The actual signal is indicated in this field The units correspond to the setting in the configuration of the user defined or virtual detector COMMUNICATION A D INTERFACE The act
82. Fraction Collector with 2 valves FC NAME Enter a descriptive name for the collector This name will appear on the fraction collector tab when the instrument setup or status windows are dis played Use a name which is unique within the instrument KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 159 OpenLAB Preparative Option TUBING The same setup procedure as with any other fraction collector must be carried out However you cannot define the tubing parameters for each included valve One setting will be valid for all cascaded valves Use the description for the settings on FIXED TIME CAPILLARY LENGTH and CAPILLARY VOLUME under Fraction Collector Configuration page 155 SLV OR PEAK RECYCLING With the MultiValve fraction collector either an addi tional recycling valve or own ports of the fraction valve for the solvent peak recycling can be used Siv Peak Recycling Recycling Volumetric delay 3 Fired time min Capillary Length cm C Use own ports for recycling 0 00 Capillary Volume cm3 0 000 Add Info Cancel Fig 230 Solvent Peak Recycling Multi Valve FC Recycling Valve Configuration Settings Serial number Valve type 6 positions Interface LAN Obtained using M IP Fort 10001 V Use S N to identify the instrument Fig 231 Recycling Valve Setup USE RECYCLING VALVE For an additional valve the communication port serial or LAN must be configured Siv Peak
83. G amp Agilent OpenLAB CDS EZChrom Edition Registration OpenLAB Shared Services Credentials Sa r pi Registration Results s Register Global Settings net pipe localhost Agilent OpenLAB Fig 6 Global A Register Application SUCCESS J Insert CDS Permissions SUCCESS Enable Activity Log SUCCESS tab with registration for a standalone workstation and message window with Registration Results 9 Close the registration window with a mouse click onto the upper right cross button The installation will then proceed KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 12 Installation 10 The following window will be displayed when the installation has com pleted Click on FINISH to finalize the KNAUER DRIVERS AND EXTENSIONS installa tion The KNAUER DRIVERS AND EXTENSIONS have been registered as KNAUER HPLC System F Knauer HPLC System InstallShield Wizard Fig 7 KNAUER HPLC System has been installed KNAUER Fraction Collectors Addon If you own a fraction collector supported by KNAUER you can install the KNAUER Fraction Collectors Addon This option can only be installed if the KNAUER DRIVERS AND EXTENSIONS KNAUER HPLC System with the same version number have already been installed 1 Click on INSTALL KNAUER FRACTION COLLECTORS ADDON to start the installation 2 In the next window the fraction collectors that should be installed can
84. ISOCRATIC HPG A HPG B and the Pump HEAD 10 ml 50 ml Pump P 4 18S If selected you can choose the Device NAME please refer to the device name section below the GRADIENT MODE ISOCRATIC HPG A HPG B and the Pump HEAD 10 ml 50 ml As the pump P 4 1S is equipped with a pressure sensor you can also select the unit for the PRESSURE UNIT MPa bar psi DETECTOR UVD 2 15 If selected you can choose the DEvicE NAME please refer to the device name section below and the Y Axis UNITS mAU mAU AU The FLOW CELL field allows for entering information regarding the used detector flow cell KNAUER VALVE If selected you can choose the DEVICE NAME please refer to the device name section below and the number of position Please be sure to select the correct number of position if you select it manually 2 6 12 or 16 POSITION can be selected For one valve in the assistant you can check the USE AS A FRACTION COLLECTOR box If selected there are additional options You can enter the VIAL VOLUME please be sure to enter the correct volume and setup TUBING and SLV PEAK RECYCLING Solvent Please refer to the chapter page 155 for detailed informa tion The NUMBER OF VIALS is determined by the selected position number of the used valve and the SLV PEAK RECYCLING setup This number is fixed If for another valve in the assistant the option USE AS A FRACTION COLLECTOR is already selected for the next valve an error message THE FRACTI
85. If there is a third device in the ASM housing isntalled you also wants to use you can either add the device as a separate module as the pump and the valve or you can add it as an ASM 2 1L but then you must remove the pump and valve from the ASM configuration select none The devices cannot be controlled by the injection module and ASM 2 1L control USE SIMULATION MODE To run the injection module in simulation mpde please check the appropriate check box In simulation mode no devices pump and KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 183 OpenLAB Preparative Option detector must be connected In a system with the Virtual Detector and the Vir tual or any other Fraction Collector you can simulate stacked injections with an already existing chromatogram to adjust the settings for stacked injections without additional sample or solvent usage Please note that for simulation also the Virtual Detector must run in simulation mode Instrument Setup Injection Module If you open the configured instrument and the instrument setup you will find an individual tab for the injection module E Instrument Setup Injection Volume 1 00 Injection Flow 1 000 Injection Duration 1 05 Stacked Injections WL2 5 2600 WL3 5 2600 WL4 S 2600 Temperature Wavelength nr Wavelength nr Fig 264 Instrument Setup Injection module The injection module will be used for the initial and the stacke
86. If you press the View report button first the following message will be dis played x Please analyze the data Fig 212 Error message After a few moments calculation time the Gaussian sequence will also appear in the background window In both cases the performed integration will now be visualized by the baseline KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 148 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options Press the View report button to open the automatically created validation report text file ChromGate Chromatography Data System 3 3 2 930 Validation report of the Integration Algorithms Reference file alkylbenzoate_reference dat Calculation Mode USF Pk Ret Time Height Area USP Width Theor Cap Resolutio Asymmetr min PAU pAU sec min Plates Factor ri y 10 Calculated 10 452 447078 00 2823826 0 01665 14787 0400 3 0357 2 4056 1 1216 T Expected 10 452 447078 00 2823826 0 014665 141787 0400 3 0357 2 4066 1 1216 T Difference 10 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 02 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Yo Calculated 11 544 36644 00 2866261 0 014957 12581 2637 3 360 5 109563 1 1037 T Expected 11 544 38644100 2866261 0 01957 12381 2657 3 601 5 09863 1 1037 T Difference 11 0 06 0 00 0 00 0 04 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Mo Calculated 12 695 296108 00 26006640 0 2318 14299 5450 5 1675 6 9554 1 0469 Oo Expected 12 6 95 29610800 2600684 0 02318 14299 5450 5 1875 9554 1 0469 T Difference 12 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ai Calculate
87. Ih KNALIER Software gt OpenLAB CDS EZChrom Edition KNAUER Instrument Contro V2600 1 PlatinBlue_Anlage_2 Offline File Edit View Method Data Sequence 7 foc fea T PDA 1 Channel 1 Time 45 0013 Minutes Amplitude 297 353 mAU PAA pap as1 T1 PDA 2X Aux Traces R Trigger FDA 1 Channel 1 High Pressure Gradient A at the end of run Pretreatment Setup Solvent Type PDA 1 3D Mixed View Views EW Synchronize EA Arange Actions Options Time 29 8991 Minutes Wavelength 200 nm 3 Library lt Purity H Spectrum a Multi Chromatogram Ratio Spectral filtering r Per peak spectrum calculations Filtering type None v Similarity Up slope similarity Background correction Down slope similarity Lambda max The peak spectrum is defined as The peak apex spectrum C The avg of the upslope apex and downslope spectra C The avg of every 2 spectra across the peak Lambda max Calculation range 190 0 950 0 nm User System Tester Project EP 01_2013 UHPLC Vors ulenhalter MN 3 Table of Contents Table of Contents Note For your own safety read the manual and always observe the warnings and safety information on the device and in the manual General DENnilONS 0 00000 1 46oea weg tev eeS wa aed Pee ee Oates 6 Using tais Manual 225 4 24 tees et bee cele oad eae eet eter h
88. L TABLE will open the Stacked injection setup again The new table will overwrite the existing one If you select the command FILL TABLE to open the setup dialog for the stacked injection table the window will show default val ues for all parameters beside the sample preparation time SIMULATE STACKED INJECTION This option is only available if the option USE SIMULA TION MODE is enabled in the Injection Module configuration Check the appro priate check box if you wish the simulate stacked injections The only detector to be selected is the virtual detector Click on OK to close the Stacked Injections table window the Injection Module instrument setup window will be shown KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Instrument Setup Aux Traces 186 OpenLAB Preparative Option In the AUX TRACES tab a trace STACKED INJ IN MODULE can be enabled The trace will show the start of the sample preparation and the stacked injection E Instrument Setup fo att Acquire Trace rit Temperature WetStream Oven C Pressure 5 1050 MPa Stacked Inj Inj Module ALU Time 7 47451 Minutes Amplitude 254 Wavelength mm WLi s 26003 WL S 2600 Wavelength nm Wavelength nm W Stacked Inj Inj Module Time 688262 Minutes Amplitude a u Hacked Inj Inj Module Fig 269 Injection Module Stacked injections trace For every stacked injection an entry for th
89. MP OFF AT THE END OF RUN S 2600 only Upon selecting this option the lamp s will switch off after the run time has elapsed This option may be used for the shutdown methods No ACTION AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option no action will take place after the run time has elapsed LAMP OFF AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option the lamp will switch off after the run time has elapsed KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Advanced 82 Creating an Instrument Control Method STANDBY AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option the detector will switch into standby after the run time has elapsed Note You should switch the lamp on from the direct control window before you start the next working session After power up allow 30 minutes for the lamp to stabilize before running samples that may require sensitive measurements ADVANCED Pressing the ADVANCED button opens the window for reference correction Reference Correction Sample 1 254 2 254 3 254 4 254 Fig 116 Reference correction window REFERENCE CORRECTION This setting can be selected to reduce the apparent noise of a signal by subtracting a reference signal Ref nm from the target signal Sample nm For instance referring to a wavelength with practically zero absorption the drift due to a too short heating time of the lamp can be eliminated Depending on to the configuration up to 4 wavelengths ca
90. N Upon selecting this option the lamp will switch off after the run time has elapsed This option may be used for the shutdown methods TIME PROGRAM The time program displays the program lines for all configured modules Please refer to the setup information of the separate instruments pump detector valve MultiValve FC for the specific setup options If a HPG is configured only a line for Pump A will be shown SHOW The drop down menu allows the selection of either showing the lines for all configured modules SHOW ALL LINES or for just one of the modules e g SHOW PumP LINES The available modules depend on the configured modules for the Assistant The option SHOW ASM 2 1L LINES allows for programming the 3 events of the Assistant TIME min Add a new time line with the time you want to change a module s setting Once you have added a line select the module you want to program in the device column If you want to change settings for several devices at the same time you must add separate lines for each module The smallest allowed time step in the time program is 0 02 minutes Device The device column allows for selecting one of the configured modules or the Assistant If a HPG is configured only the HPG A pump can be selected 3RD COLUMN The 34 column allows for entering a value for the selected device If no line is selected the header shows If a pump is selected the column header show FLow ml min and the f
91. N TO IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT must be enabled Click on the button to start the search for all ASM 2 1L instruments LEAK SENSOR SENSITIVITY Select the leak sensor s sensitivity in accordance with your requirements The choices are OFF Low MEDIUM and HIGH ADD INFO Click the button ADD INFO to enter more detailed description of the assistant Additional Information OK Cancel Fig 58 Additional information box Note If you read out the Assistant device using AUTO CONFIGURATION or the button you may not configure your Assistant device manually This is the recommended approach The automatic configuration eliminates the risk of a faulty configuration Nevertheless the man ual configuration is possible and will be described below KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Left Device Device Type 44 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems As the same modules and settings can be selected in all three positions the options will only be described for the Left Device tab Pump PATS o 7 Pump F4 15 Deye keme eer KETE Knauer Valve Valco Valve Cancel Help Fig 59 Configuration windows left device tab device type selection Device TYPE Select the device type that is installed on the left side in the assis tant housing from the drop down menu PumP P 2 15 lf selected you can choose the Device NAME please refer to the device name section below the GRADIENT MODE
92. N option SAVE CHANGES IN TIME TABLE is enabled all program lines for stacked injections which have not already been executed during the current run will be replaced by the stacked injections from the direct control At the same time lines for stacked injections which have already been executed during the current run remain untouched If the DIRECT CONTROL DURING A RUN option SAVE CHANGES IN TIME TABLE is not active the new table will be executed but not stored in the instrument setup How ever in this case the method does not include the correct injection program gt Pressing the button opens a window which allows you for perform sev eral service operations TRAY POSITION You can move the tray to several positions The choices are TRAY HOME NEEDLE EXCHANGE POSITION and TRAY FRONT SYRINGE POSITION The syringe can be moved to HOME END or EXCHANGE POSITION VALVE POSITION The valve can be switch to INJECT and LOAD position Instrument Status Manager S 5050 M 1 IF 2 1FU 2 1 E Instrument Status lt gt System Status Ejs 1050 ei AS g Switching Valves mS 2300 User Defined Detector faa 10 1 Run Status AD m 0 ADF U An Output nm Digital Output ll Digital Output Apply g Interface IF2VIFU2 1 Device 1 at COMB SVM 103021 Version 1 05 Fig 196 Instrument Status Manager M 1 5050 IF 2 IFU 2 1 RUN STATUS The status HOLD displayed when no program is running other wis
93. ON 1 PULSE P and _ means no change Refer to the detector s user manual for details about digital outputs parameters Use the ALL ON or ALL OFF buttons to switch all of the outputs either on or off If the detector lamp is disabled the event outputs cannot be controlled they will remain in the last set status KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Detector Instrument Setup 74 Creating an Instrument Control Method Instrument Setup Detectors S 2550 50D MW 1 K 2600 The settings for the 50D are similar to the settings for the S 2550 please use the descriptions and notes to the S 2550 A Instrument Setup fo Sa E S 2550 ae Trigger Time constant Sec Used Channels v 1 Sampling Rate Hz Suitable for minimum peak width at base of 0 333 Min Run time Acquisition delay Start 200 End 500 Advanced V Autozero at start at the end of run Acquire 3D data Autozero at WL change Wavelength nm Wavelength nm Fig 103 Instrument Setup detector S 2550 K2600 and MW 1 The detectors S 2550 K 2600 and MW 1 support the same general settings as shown above when one data acquisition channel is selected If more than one data acquisition channel is selected the Sampling Rate is replaced by the Wavelength Toggle Mode WAVELENGTH TOGGLE MODE S 2550 MW 1 ONLY In this mode either High Sensi tivity optimized for high wavelength accuracy or High Data Rate optimized for high d
94. ON COLLECTION OPTION IS ALREADY SELECTED FOR ANOTHER VALVE will be shown KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Left Device Middle Device Right Device 45 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems VALCO VALVE If selected you can choose the Device NAME please refer to the device name section below and the position number Please be sure to select the correct position number if you select it manually 2 6 8 10 12 or 16 position can be selected For one valve in the assistant you can check the USE As A FRACTION COLLECTOR box If selected there are additional options You can enter the VIAL VOLUME please be sure to enter the correct volume and setup TUBING and SLV PEAK RECYCLING Solvent Please refer to the chapter Multi Valve Fraction Collector Configuration for detailed information The NUMBER OF VIALS is determined by the selected position number of the used valve and the SLv PEAK RECYCLING setup This number is fixed If for another valve in the assistant the option USE AS A FRACTION COLLECTOR is already selected for the next valve an error message THE FRACTION COLLECTION OPTION IS ALREADY SELECTED FOR ANOTHER VALVE will be shown DEVICE NAME The default name corresponds to the selected device type All device names must be unique in an instrument configuration Therefore enter different names for the same device types for instance if a high pressure gradient is used If the configuration is rea
95. S 3050 must be selected using a switch on the collector s rear panel SERIAL PORT COM Port Select from the drop down list the serial port number for the communication port on your PC where the collector is connected BAUD RATE only Foxy R1 R2 Only a baud rate of 19200 baud is supported If you control your Foxy R1 or R2 via serial port please select the baud rate of 19200 in the collector s own setup RACK TYPE Select from the drop down list the required rack type The possible choices depend on the type of fraction collector Make sure that the same rack type is selected in the collector s own setup The NUMBER OF VIALS will be dis played automatically VIAL VOLUME The rack dependent default value will be displayed automatically For some rack types different vials are available However you are able to over write the vial volume with self defined values It is in your own responsibility to setup a proper value to prevent that the vials will be overfilled The entered vial volume is valid for all vials of the fraction collector If any fraction is larger than the set volume the next free collection position will be used for continued collection TUBING PARAMETERS These settings enable someone to consider the time delay for transporting the sample from the flow cell to the collector valve If the option USE RECYCLING VALVE is checked the capillary from the flow cell via the recycling valve to the fractionation valve must be
96. T Digital Output is displayed in this control The On state is represented by a red active Light Emis sion Diode LED symbol the Off state including waiting for pulse is repre sented by an inactive gray LED symbol 3 Pump The left hand part of the Pump section shows the pump status such as FLOW in ml min and pressure depending on the selected unit in MPa bar or psi Flow Status The FLow displayed here is the current pump flow set either by direct control or a method PRESSURE only for P4 1S The shown pressure is the current system pressure measured by the pump s pressure sensor The unit depends on the pressure unit selected in the pump s configuration MPa bar or psi Please note that also a pressure may be measured if the pump is stopped e g if another pump is running or if the flow path is blocked If only a pump without a pressure sen sor is configured the pressure section is grayed out The right hand part of the Pump section allows for direct control of the pump independently from the method setup During a run this section is not accessi ble Flow Direct Control Enter the desired flow for the pump and click on the APPLY button to start the pump or change the current flow If the flow rate is out of the acceptable flow range defined by the mounted pump head an appropriate error message will be shown KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 130 Instrument Status of a Running Cont
97. The Diagnostics window allows you to check several parameters of the device r Diagnostics Integration Time Range 10 1000 10 2 mSec Shutter Opened Open z Apply Scan nm Range 184 1023 nm Start 200 End 400 Bandwidth 1 Mode Absorption a Signal ADC Counts Dark Signal 3000 Reset Dark Set Reference Spectrum 2000 Save Spectrum 1000 ow D fa 250 300 350 400 Wavelength nm Help Fig 178 Diagnostics window of Diode Array Detectors PDA 1 INTEGRATION TIME The integration time is the time interval in which the detector accumulates light to receive one spectrum This value is a measure of the inten sity of light originating from a lamp The more light that passes the optical scheme and the cell the shorter the integration time will be The integration time depends also on the specific spectral interval Scan selected for the mea surement since the maximum of intensity may be varied The integration time range is defined by the device parameters Click the 7 button to determine the optimal integration time You can use this measurement to check the quality of the lamp and used optical elements If the software cannot find an optimum integration time the lowest time of the range i e 12 mSec will be shown KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 121 Instrument Statu
98. W Wait Autosampler 97 101 Wait before injection Column Thermostat 110 Wait time Autosampler 99 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 207 Index Column Thermostat 110 Wait with tolerance Autosampler 99 Column Thermostat 110 Wash times Autosampler 95 99 Wavelength Program DAD Detector 79 Detector 74 Fluorescence Detector 86 UV Detector 73 Wavelength program DAD Detector 81 83 Wavelength toggle mode Detector 74 Write Pump 27 Y Y Axis Detector 35 Y Axis Multiplier User Defined Detector 38 Y Axis Offset User Defined Detector 38 Y Axis Units Flowmeter 57 User Defined Detector 38 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 KNAUER Wissenschaftliche Gerate GmbH All rights reserved Technical data are subject to change without notice Please check our website for latest updates and changes Version 1 4 Last manual update 2015 06 30 PLATINblue BlueShadow Smartline and AZURA are registered trademarks of KNAUER Wissenschaftliche Gerate GmbH bm See up to date manuals online www knauer net downloads HPLC SMB Osmometry KNAUER Phone 49 30 809727 0 Wissenschaftliche Ger te GmbH Telefax 49 30 8015010 Hegauer Weg 38 E Mail info knauer net D 14163 Berlin Germany Internet www knauer net www knauer net Ih KNALIER KNAUER 2013 V2600 1 0 00 06 14
99. al V2600 1 Version 1 4 104 Creating an Instrument Control Method Table Fill DOWN to fill the table with the same settings as in the selected line functions INSERT LINE to add a new line DELETE LINE to delete the selected line DELETE LINES to delete all selected lines FILL TABLE to open the Stacked Injection setup again The new table will over write the existing one If you select the command FILL TABLE to open the setup dialog box for the stacked injection table the window will show default values for all parameters besides the sample preparation time Click on OK to close the Stacked Injections table window the autosampler 3950 or AS 1 instrument setup window will be shown Autosam In the AUX TRACES tab a trace STACKED INJ AS 3950 or STACKED INJ AS 1 can be pler Instru enabled The trace will show the start of the sample preparation and the ment Setup stacked injection Instrument Setup 5 lesa att Acquire Trace rit 1 1 E Tra Temperature 5 3950 i E Stacked Inj 5 3950 au Fig 145 Autosampler 3950 Stacked injections auxiliary traces Wi Stacked Inj AS 3950 Time 9 90881 Minutes Amplitude 0 a u Stacked Inj 45 3950 Fig 146 Autosampler 3950 Stacked injections trace KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 105 Creating an Instrument Control Method For every stacked injection an entry for the sample preparation and the injec tion wil
100. al depend on the unit selected in the ASM 2 1L configuration for the detector The right hand part of the UV section allows for direct control of the detector independently from the method setup During a run this part is not accessible except for the autozero AZ button WL Direct Control Enter the desired wavelength for the detector and click on the Apply button to change the wavelength in the detector If the wavelength is out of the acceptable wavelength range an appropriate error message will be shown LAMP OFF LAMP ON HEATING This button allows for switching off or on the detector lamp The labeling indicates what will happen if the button is pressed it does not show the lamp status If the lamp is on the button shows LAMP OFF because the lamp will be switched off if you click on it It shows LAMP ON if the detector lamp is off clicking the button will switch on the lamp While the deuterium lamp is heating the button is inaccessible and is labeled HEATING AZ If you click on this button the detector will perform an autozero which means the current signal will be set to O zero This button is also active KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 132 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method during a run During a run clicking on this button while a peak elutes will make the peak information area maybe also retention time unusable VALVE S The left hand part of the VALVE S section sho
101. ark to the analog output SENSITIVITY GAIN RECORDER RANGE and OUTPUT MODE The values for the SENSITIVITY GAIN RECORDER RANGE and the OuTPuUT MODE can be selected from the drop down menus Fields with selections available will display an arrow button when the field or row is selected Click the button to display the available choices KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 87 Creating an Instrument Control Method SENSITIVITY The available choices for the SENSITIVITY are HIGH MED and LOW For the OUTPUT Mope the available choices are EXCITATION ENERGY LIGHT SOURCE COR RECTION and EMISSION NOT CORRECTED Light source correction Emission not corrected Fig 123 Drop down menus in the Fluorescence Detector RF 20A Axs wavelength program Instrument Setup User Defined Detector For user defined detectors only the general detector settings described above can be set Instrument Setup Virtual Detector A virtual detector is not a real instrument but a software tool with special func tions For instance it is possible to carry out simulations or corrections of chro matograms with this detector The results are be stored as normally created chromatogram The virtual detector requires the same general settings as described above to be set Fg vE BS Trigger Fare _ Advanced Fig 124 Instrument Setup Virtual detector KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 88 Creating
102. aste gray fraction green peak recycling red solvent recycling blue SIGNAL The actual value of the controlling detector channel is displayed VIAL The actual fraction vial number is displayed KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Rack view 178 OpenLAB Preparative Option FR TIME min The collection time for the actual fraction is displayed FR VOLUME ml The collected volume of the actual fraction is displayed The Direct Control allows for direct programming the fraction collector inde pendently from the method setup If you wish to do the same if a method is running you have to enable the option DIRECT CONTROL DURING A RUN in the RUN TIME SETTINGS page 142 Please note that using this option will change the running method The changes will not be shown if you later on extract the original method of the data file MODE Choose SINGLE EVENT or PEAK RECOGNITION OPERATION The operation which shall be performed can be selected from the drop down menu If the mode SINGLE EVENT is selected the choices are WASTE COLLECT SLICES TO PEAK RECYCLING Or SOLVENT RECYCLING the recycling options will only be available if a recycling valve is configured The selected operation will be executed by clicking on the SET button For the mode PEAK RECOGNITION the options are SIGNAL LEVEL SIGNAL SLOPE and LEVEL SLOPE If you click on SET a setup window equal to the one described for the mentioned optio
103. ata rate can be selected The maximum data rate can only be reached if just one data acquisition chan nel is selected Additionally also the LAN connection must be selected in the detector configuration Via RS 232 the maximum data rate is limited on 10 Hz for one channel WAVELENGTH PROGRAM In the wavelength table detector parameter changes to be executed during a run can be defined in a time based table The table has columns for TIME MIN WAVELENGTH in nm and EVENTS In the first row at time 0 00 min enter the initial wavelength s in nm The editing principle is the same as for the time gradient program described in the chapter Pump Pro gram USED CHANNEL Check the box es to activate the acquisition for the selected channel s Only channels that have been selected in the instrument configura tion of the detector are available If a box is not selected no data will be acquired and no time program will be executed for this channel For each acti vated channel at least one a corresponding wavelength column will appear in the wavelength program spreadsheet AUTOZERO AT START Check this field if you wish the signal s to be zeroed upon a wavelength change during a run KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Action at the end of run Detector Instrument Setup 75 Creating an Instrument Control Method AUTOZERO AT WL CHANGE Check this field if you wish the signal to be zeroed upon a wavelengt
104. b when the instrument setup or status windows are dis played Use a name which is unique within the instrument KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Interface Autosam pler Config uration 47 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems SERIAL NUMBER You must type in the serial number from the manufacturer s label on the rear panel of the autosampler The better choice is to read out the serial number using the button not available for RS 232 communication INTERFACE Select the interface you want to use for communication with the device Please note that the autosampler 3950 can have RS 232 or LAN inter face The communication port on the autosampler s rear panel is labeled Communication Fig 61 Available interfaces Smartline autosampler 3950 RS 232 Select the number for the RS 232 communication port COM Port on your PC to which the autosampler is connected LAN All LAN controlled devices can be added and configured automatically using the AUTO CONFIGURATION button in the Instrument selection window In addition to this you can let the software search for your already connected and switched on device from the devices configuration window For this the option Use S N TO IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT must be enabled Click on the button to start the search for all connected LAN devices of the currently configured type If more than one is found all hits will be shown in the window Select the
105. be selected As default all supported fraction collectors will be selected Click on NEXT to confirm the window Knauer HPLC System InstallShield Wizard Fig 8 Select devices KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 13 Installation 3 In the next window click on INSTALL to start the installation To cancel the installation procedure click CANCEL F Knauer HPLC System InstallShield Wizard S e Fig 9 Start FRC installation 4 The following window will be displayed when the installation has com pleted Click on FINISH to finalize the KNAUER fraction collectors AddOn installation Generic Drivers Installation The Generic Drivers installer includes drivers for some devices from third party manufacturers Generic Drivers only allow for limited control not all device fea tures can be supported Note Start OpenLAB by clicking START ALL PROGRAMS AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES OPENLAB OPENLAB CONTROL PANEL Licensing Once installed the OpenLAB EE software runs for 60 days without limitation start up license whereas the regular license must be created online The software delivery includes an authorization code which has to be send together with the MAC address of the OpenLAB computer s network adapter to KNAUER If this is done KNAUER can create the license file
106. be enabled Select the desired device from the shown list The software will read out information such as serial number and will fill it automatically into the configuration screen To search for an instrument the device must be con nected switched on and must have a valid IP address Optionally you can enter the IP address of your device if the option USE S N To IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT is disabled Please note that if the device receives the IP address from a DHCP server for example a router the IP address may change if the device is switched off and switched on again When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument configuration icon list LEFT VALVE RIGHT VALVE Select the type of the valve from the drop down list The choices are 6 Port MPos 8 Port MPos 10 Port MPos 6 Port 2Pos 8 Port 2Pos and 10 Port 2Pos The valves for both sides can be different if the option COLUMN SWITICHING OPTION is not selected COLUMN SWITCHING OPTION If for both valve positions the same valve type is selected the option COLUMN SWITCHING OPTION can be selected This option allows for switching both valves at the same time with only one command action POST COLUMN COOLING only T 1 If the post column cooling is enabled the post column temperature can be selected in the instrument setup method KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 57 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems LEAK SENSOR LEVEL
107. be switched on next time The lamp must then manually switched on either via the detector s control pad or with the direct control function in the software START END SCAN The Scan range must be entered and when the direct control is active a scan can be performed manually during a run DIGITAL CHANNELS CH 1 2 3 4 The wavelength of all channels can be changed WL APPLY TO send the changed wavelength to the detector click the WL APPLY button EVENTS Click the button to set up the event outputs Refer to the chapter section Configuring Events page 67 for details EVENTS APPLY If the events have been setup you must click the Events Apply button to send the settings to the detector This status area is only shown for pumps offering this feature DIAGNOSTICS The Diagnostics allow for some detector function check Diagnostics C Quick Scan f Scan nm Range 190 900 rm Start 200 End 300 Filter Open Open Apply AZ Scan Reset 44 Scan Signal Wavelength 876 7 nm Amplitude 75 173 Autocalibration Reference Signal Abs Spectrum Holm Spectrum Save Spectrurn 500 B00 me Wavelength nm Fig 175 Diagnostics window MW 1 START AND END OF SCAN The scan range sets the limits for the test scan The max imum range is defined by the device specification FILTER POSITION The detectors can work with different filters The Holmium filter allows for che
108. ble The wavelength table is a spreadsheet to enter your time detector program In the first row at time 0 00 min the initial wavelength is shown The editing principle including programming the digital outs is the same as for the time gradient program described in the chapter CONFIGURING PUMP PROGRAM SPECTRUM nm not for MWD 2 1L Fig 112 DAD setup spectrum This section allows you to specify the scan spectral interval in nm The given range limits are read out from the used instrument KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Action at the end of run Detector Instrument Setup Advanced 80 Creating an Instrument Control Method STORE 3D DATA not for MWD 2 1L You have access to this selection field only with the DAD option RANGE FROM TO not for MWD 2 1L Enter the start and end wavelength for the scan In nm BANDWIDTH not for MWD 2 1L The bandwidth is the wavelength range that is used to measure a data point For the spectral acquisition it is highly recom mended to use a bandwidth of 1 nm Note The scan section limits Start and End are important even if no DAD option is available or no 3D data will be stored All of the measuring wavelengths in the Wavelength Program for the used channels must be within these limits LAMPS ON REQUIRED FOR ACQUISITION not for MWD 2 1L You can check the boxes for D2 LAMP and HAL LAmp For the full spectrum range both lamps must be switched o
109. centage values into the AOF Analog Output Factor column The output voltage produced by the Manager S 5050 M 1 IF 2 and IFU 2 1 will be the result of Voltage AOF 100 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 106 Creating an Instrument Control Method The influence of the STEP MODE option is illustrated in the next figure EJ Manager 5050 S IF 21FU 21 E M1 X Trigger E Manager 5050 J IF 21FU 21 E MI Trigger Step Mode AOF AOF 100 100 50 50 min min o o o 1 2 3 4 o 1 2 3 4 Fig 149 Analog output profile without and with activated Step Mode Instrument Setup Switching Valves Instrument Setup g Switching Valves Frogram nnn i WU G a panne EE bor Valves Program Profile a E E E E E i E Lh a 2 Fig 150 Instrument Setup KNAUER Switching Valves Use this spreadsheet to enter your time program The number of columns cor responds to the number of configured valves in the system In the first row at time 0 00 enter the initial position for each valve Then you can define the status of each valve at the given times The choices for a KNAUER 2 position valve are BLANK L Load and Inject for a Vici 2 position valve BLANK A Load and B Inject 1 through to 6 for a 6 position valve 1 through to 8 for a 8 position valve 1 through to 10 for a 10 position valve 1 through to 12 for a 12 position valve and 1 through to 16 for a 16
110. ch the Manager S 5050 M 1 or the Interface Box IF 2 IFU 2 1 is connected Note The channels of the configured Interface Boxes or Managers can be used independently to acquire signals or control devices in different instruments at the same time An instrument is a configuration of a system in OpenLAB The desired channel that should be used in an instrument for the data acqusition User Defined Detector or con trol Manager IF I O must be configured in the instrument config uration CHANNEL Four data acquisition channels are available by default However if the 50 Hz option for data acquisition is enabled only channel 1 is available RANGE Select the Signal RANGE for the channel chosen from the channel drop down list The choices are 2 56 V 1 28 V 0 64 V 0 32 V 0 16 V The Signal Range specifies the maximum analog input voltage to be digitized by an A D converter Use the Signal Range to optimize the signal to noise ratio of the measured signal MANUFACTURER AND MODEL This area is for information purposes only It contains manufacturing information about the box which may be required in service sit uations If you try to store a interface configuration without a serial number an appro priate error message appears In this case please click on OK enter the correct serial number of the A D converter and try again Click OK and enter the required settings The same message will appear if you try to close the
111. cking the wavelength accuracy The FILTER 2ND ORDER Suppresses the light from 200 300 nm while the FILTER 2ND ORDER HIGH suppresses the light from 200 500 nm This prevents that light from lower wavelengths will inter fere the signal at higher wavelengths Which of the 2nd order filters will be used depend on the selected wavelengths in the detector s wavelength pro KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 118 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method gram The selected filter will only be moved into the light beam if the APPLY button is pressed QUICK SCAN In difference to a default scan the quick scan will be performed with larger steps This will result in a less precise result spectrum but will speed up the scan time The increment depends on the incoming light AZ SCAN An autozero scan will set the value for each measurement point in the spectrum to zero RESET AZ SCAN Pressing this button the stored AZ Scan will be deleted AUTOCALIBRATION A click on the AUTOCALIBRATION button will start the device cali bration It is the same procedure that the device will run with each device start REFERENCE After clicking the REFERENCE button the device will run a scan of the reference signal the light will not pass the flow cell The resulting scan will be shown in the signal window SIGNAL After clicking the SiGNAL button the device will run a scan of the mea surement signal the light wil
112. commend reanalyzing the chromatogram with the changed method All methods used to analyze a chromatogram will also be added to the chromatogram data file and can be extracted as From Results in the Open Data dialog box ADVANCED If you click the ADVANCED button three additional options become available Advanced Method Settings Check run time when saving method E Enabled System wake up and all lamps on Cane Trace name Use initial WL in trace name If this option i checked the trace name contains the initial WL Othenvise it contains the name of the corresponding channel as defined in the configuration Fig 204 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Option Advanced Runtime Settings CHECK RUN TIME WHEN SAVING METHOD OpenLAB allows different run times for all devices If you wish to have the same run time for all devices and let the soft ware check if for example after a change all devices have the same run time enable this option If there are different run times the software displays an error message with the run time of all devices The run times must be equalized before you can save the message Run time check Failed One or more instruments have a different run time S2200 15 00 min 51050 10 00 min Fig 205 Error message Run time check failed KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 144 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options Note If enabled this option is va
113. correction window eee eee eee eee 82 DAD Setup SEAN TANGE ce 28 ca tk biw sce Ren teh tated eba a 83 Detector S 2600 wavelength program table 83 Error message 3D datafile too big 2 006 84 Instrument Setup Conductivity Monitor S 2900 85 Instrument Setup Conductivity Monitor CM 2 18 85 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 192 Table of Figures Instrument Setup Fluorescence Detector RF 20A Axs 86 Drop down menus in the Fluorescence Detector RF 20A Axs wave IGNOU DIOGIAM 24534200 deweree ty een Ge tee heegey dere ee 87 Instrument Setup Virtual detector 00 00 87 Virtual detector setup data file selection 88 Virtual detector setup data file selection 89 Virtual detector setup channel selection 89 Virtual detector setup time table 000
114. cted switched on and must have a valid IP address Optionally you can enter the IP address of your device if the option USE S N To IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT is disabled Please note that when the device receives the IP address from a DHCP server e g a router the IP address may change if the device is switched off and switched on again Intertace LAN ka H Obtained using 5M IP Port 10001 V Use S N to identify the instrument Fig 48 LAN interface dialog CHANNELS available not for all detectors For multiple wavelength detectors more than one channel can be activated According to the selected number the channel fields become accessible for editing The channel name CHN NAME will be shown later in the method window and in the result reports Only channels which have been activated in the detector configuration will later be available in the method setup for data acquisition MORE You can enter a name for channel 5 8 ADD INFO only for K 2600 Click the button ADD INFO to enter a detailed description of the detector SERIAL NUMBER If you read out the device via LAN the serial number is added automatically Otherwise type in the serial number of the detector you are using The serial number of network controlled detectors is used for the device identification and addressing during communication This serial number must match the serial number of the defined detector If not an appropriate error messag
115. cted KNAUER pumps dis plays GLP Good Laboratory Practice related information transferred to or downloaded from the pump Pressing the REFRESH GLP button will actualize this information The extent of the information depends on the given pump KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 110 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Note The GLP information will not saved Get GLP namaka Instrument data Serial number ASAOSS600007 Firmware version 1 05 Firmware subversion 005 Instrument installation date 08 02 2010 14 54 41 Last service date 18 10 2011 16 32 31 Last service code amp Board working time 5199 7 h Total volume 23 103 Power index 17 4 MPah Motor Working time 295 2 h Number of revolutions 963054 Fig 166 GLP Information pump S 1050 Instrument data pump Serial number Firmware version Firmware subversion Instrument installation date Last service date Last service code Board working time Total volume Power index Motor Working time Number of revolutions Pump head Serial number Type Maximum flow Maximum pressure Working time Number of cycles Total volume Power index DIRECT CONTROL The direct control area will appear disabled as long as the direct control option is not activated Except during a run it can be activated via the menu SEQUENCE METHOD RUNTIME SETTINGS see Fig 203 on page 142 The direct control enables someone to control the instr
116. ction If the autosampler needs a longer time than pro grammed it will inject immediately after the injection preparation is finished In this case the next stacked injection will be delayed by this extra time DO NOT WASH THE NEEDLE BETWEEN INJECTIONS FROM SAME VIAL Checking this option prevents the needle wash if the stacked injection is made from the same vial as KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fill table 103 Creating an Instrument Control Method the previous injection This option may be useful for saving time or increasing the reproducibility of injections Make a right mouse click into the time table and select Fill table from the corre sponding menu Stacked Injections Cancel Number of Injections 2 Sample tal Next ka Injection Wolume pl 10d Sample Preparation Time min 025 Time between Injections min 1 00 M Do not wash needle between injections from same vial Fig 144 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Stacked Injections Table Setup NUMBER OF INJECTIONS Enter the number of stacked injections For example if you enter 2 two stacked injections will be made in addition to the initial injec tion therefore 3 injections in all will be made per run Please make sure that you have enough samples for the entered number of injection SAMPLE VIAL Select the vials the stacked injection should be made from Select SAME for injections from the same vial as the previous injection
117. ction and all following stacked injections If you can use the same collection parameters for all fractions it is more comfort able program the parameters once for the whole run time for all stacked injec tions and leave the Adjust FRC table option unchecked Due to that the delay if entered is always active you should set the INITIAL ADJUST TIME to O if no stacked injection is used FLOW ML MIN If a pump in Pume is selected this field shows acc to accord ingly to and is not accessible The pump flow for calculated the fraction vial filling level and fraction delay time will be automatically escaped from the pump program table Flow gradients steps or linear are accepted If no pump is selected you must enter a flow for the calculation The maximum allowed flow depends on the selected fraction vial volume and the resulting time for a fraction A fraction requires in minimum 5 seconds If the entered flow is not equal to the real flow the calculation for the vial filling level and the time delay of the fractions is wrong and may result in overfilled fraction vials and or wrong or not collected components Pump If a pump is configured in the system select the desired pump from the drop down list for volume and delay calculations The pump flow will be auto matically escaped from the pump program table The FLow setup will show acc to If no pump is selected you must enter a flow for the calculation RACK CONFIGURATION PATH In a
118. d 13 925 21515400 2466452 0 03020 15020 6299 7 2619 amp r046 1 0118 T Expected 13 925 21515400 2468432 0 0302 15020 6299 T 2619 6 7 046 1 0115 0 Difference 13 0 04 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Yo Calculated 17 12 74 14950800 22659360 04052 15821 8555 10 3780 17915 0 9596 T Expected 17 1274 14950800 22659560 04052 15621 8555 10 5780 1 7915 0 9596 0 Difference 17 0 03 0 00 0 00 0 04 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Mo Date Wed Dec OF 18 17 29 2011 Fig 213 Validation report reference chromatogram KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 149 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options ChromGate Chromatography Data System 3 3 2 980 Validation report of the Integration Algorithms Reference file Gaussian trace baseline drift 0 Calculation Mode USF PKS Ret Time Height Area USP Wich Theor Cap Resolutio Asymmetr imin pAU pAU sec imin Plates Factor n yw 10 Calculated 1 1 00 99999600 15039451 0 4058 97 1724 0 1071 0 agog 1 0000 oo Expected 1 7 00 1000000 0 15039765 0 4000 100 0000 0 1071 0 agog 1 0000 BS Difference i 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 44 2 83 0 00 0 00 0 00 a Calculated 2 2 00 499997 00 7519692 0 0 4058 336 6902 Oo ras 2 4644 1 0000 0 Expected 2 2 00 50000000 7519864 6 0 4000 400 0000 Ooo 2 S000 1 0000 2 Difference 2 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 44 2 83 0 00 1 42 0 00 a Calculated 3 3 00 249996 00 3759525 0 0 4058 of4 S573 1 6756 2 4644 1 0000 0 Expected a 3 00 25000000 37
119. d for data acquisition You must config ure your data acquisition interface before you can acquire analog data using the data system The KNAUER interfaces can also be used to control other devices by analog or digital output Please refer the manuals of your device and the A D converter to determine whether the device s output or input signal is compatible with the A D converter s signal input or output Interface configuration is accessed through START ALL PROGRAMS AGILENT TECH NOLOGIES OPENLAB CDS EZCHROM EDITION right click on AGILENT SS420X INTER FACE CONFIGURATION and select RUN AS ADMINISTRATOR A window will appear displaying several possible interface devices If you cannot run the configurator as administrator you cannot store the configuration KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 19 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems KNAUER Interface Configuration If you are using either a KNAUER Interface Box IF 2 IFU 2 1 or a Manager S 5050 or M 1 click on the corresponding icon and then click PROPERTIES or double click on the instrument icon A dialog box will appear in which you can configure the Interface Box see Dialog box for configuring the Manager S 5050 Interface Configuration EVES es Manager 5000 Manager M 1 IF2A1FU2 1 55420x A D Fig 15 Selection window for interface configuration m Interface setup Number of boxes ix Configure box da Serial numbe
120. d injections INJECTION PROGRAM The settings in this section will only be used for the initial Injection that means for the first injection at the start of the run INJECTION VOLUME Enter the desired injection volume in ml INJECTION FLOW Enter the flow rate of the injection pump during the injection If no injection is prepared the pump is stopped during a run the pump and valve cannot be controlled beside the programmed stacked injection INJECTION DURATION The duration of the injection is calculated from the injection volume and the injection flow The reduced flow during start and stop of the pump is taken into account with 6 seconds in sum CONTROL PRESSURE LIMITS Enter the values for the desired pressure limit O will disable the software control of the pressure Keep in mind that the pressure for the sample loading may be different from the system pressure during a run if a different flow rate is used or if you use a sample loop Note that for a pump S 100 without pressure transducer this option is not accessible SOLVENT Enter the name of the solvent STACKED INJECTIONS gt gt The option Stacked injections allows to define addi tional injections during a run Such injections can be programmed either for KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Stacked Injections Fill Table 184 OpenLAB Preparative Option the autosampler 3950 AS 1 or the injection module please refer to the Instru ment Se
121. d out by AUTO CONFIGURATION or using the Button the software will name devices from the same type automati cally with different names For valves a letter in regard to the valve s position in the assistant will be added for example a valve in left position will be named ValveL Pumps receive an A or B increment for HPG A or B pump It is possi ble edit the automatically given name as well as the HPG position for the pumps MIDDLE Device As the same modules and settings can be selected in all three positions the options can be found under the Left Device tab section RiGHT Device As the same modules and settings can be selected in all three posi tions the options can be found under the Left Device tab section Note If one of the modules should not be controlled it must be removed from the ASM 2 1L configuration There is no option to disable a configured module later on in the Method Setup If you wants to control a pump and a valve of the ASM in an Injection Module the devices must be controlled separately There is an option to control it them independently from the ASM module The procedure is described as follows All configuration must be done manually the device configuration cannot been read out 1 Add the Injection Module and open the configuration screen 2 Enter a unique name for the device 3 The serial number must be the same as for the ASM Instead of the serial number you can also use the IP addres
122. de 979 937 mA Trace Annotation Properties Annotation Trace fi Current Data 5 2520 Channel 1 Fractions Available Annotations Show the following annotations Fraction Number gt Vial Number Fraction 19 Vial 19 Fraction 20 Vial 20 Decimals p 2 gt T 5 e 2 So Gs pre action 18 Vial 18 Other T RT Window O Group Range M Show undetected named peaks M FRC Actual lt i Fraction 1 Vial 1 Fraction 16 Vial 16 Fraction 17 Vial 17 Fraction 21 Vial 21 OK Abbrechen Apply To All Hilfe _Abbrechen _Cbershmen _AoyToAn Hie ma 29 00 29 25 29 50 29 75 30 00 30 25 30 50 30 75 31 00 31 26 32 00 32 26 32 50 Minutes Fig 261 FRC Annotation Chromatogram KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 181 OpenLAB Preparative Option To change the settings for colors font type etc open the chromatogram s appearance right mouse click on the chromatogram Appearance Select the correct detector channel in Trace and select the annotation you want to change the settings for Appearance Properties Appearance Scheme Save As Item Subitem f1 Current Data 5 2520 Channel 1 Line Style Size Color mec ie FRC Actual 2 Abbrechen Hilfe Fig 262 Chromatogram FRC Appearance Please note that for report previews as well as for pdf prints the fraction color may not be shown correctly If the report is printed
123. destination vial position A destination vial is required for sample mixing or dilution Enter the first destination vial position For each injection a destination vial will be used for mixing or diluting Sample and destination vial positions must not been mixed the first destination vial position must be behind the last sample vial position When tray configuration is complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument configuration window When the autosampler configuration is complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument configuration icon list Note The autosampler KNAUER Optimas must be set in to serial mode to be controlled by software Press the SERIAL button to switch the autosampler into serial mode Configuration Miscellaneous Instruments Configuration Switching Valves The switching valves icon refers to a group of the KNAUER switching valves the Valco VICI valves icon to the latest VICI valve drives Each of them must be configured before using in an instrument method For the KNAUER valve drives the desired interface RS 232 or LAN must not be selected on the device the used port will be identified automatically KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Valve Con figuration Interface 53 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems If a switching valve should be used as a fraction collector please configure it as a Multi valve fraction collector The
124. dialog box and return to the instrument configuration icon list KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 59 Creating an Instrument Control Method Creating an Instrument Control Method If you have the Instrument Control option installed and your instrument is con figured as a KNAUER HPLC System the instrument control functions appear as part of the Instrument Setup area of your instrument window To launch an instrument a project must be selected for the instrument There are two ways to launch an instrument to access the Instrument window where you can set up your devices and methods 1 Select in the Instrument section of the Control Panel the desired instrument and click on LAUNCH or LAUNCH OFFLINE 2 Right click on the desired instrument and select LAUNCH or LAUNCH OFFLINE from the context menu Note Make sure that all devices of the selected instrument are switched on and connected to the correct communication ports of the com puter before opening the instrument window Some devices must be switched into SERIAL MODE to be controlled by software If a device is not switched on or not connected to the computer upon opening the instrument window please close the instrument window switch on or connect the device and reopen the instru ment window if all devices have started correctly Otherwise the communication of the devices with the software can be affected All of the functions and procedures described in
125. dom more measurements will decrease the noise because for each positive noise excursion there is a good likelihood that it will be can celed by a negative excursion But since the signal is not random it will remain the same over multiple measurements A high bandwidth value will decrease the noise level but also decrease the pos sible resolution which can be measured The default value is 8 nm but if your peaks have substantially wider UV spectra you can increase the bandwidth value in OpenLAB to obtain a lower noise level Each discrete channel can use its own wavelength program and can be mea sured with its own bandwidth so you can always obtain the lowest noise con ditions while still having a low enough bandwidth to not degrade the resolution measured This means that the diode array detectors can always be optimized for maxi mum performance The scan parameters can be set to the values which are optimal for doing the scans and yet the discrete channels can be measured independently at their optimal values The wavelength table is a spreadsheet to enter your time detector program In the first row at time 0 00 min enter the initial wavelength s in nm The editing principle including programming the digital outs S 2600 only is the same as for the time gradient program described in the chapter CONFIGURING PUMP PROGRAM The 3D data acquisition size is limited If this limit is exceeded due to the cur rent settings an err
126. ds x _ standard rck 18 06 2013 10 57 Recent Places 3 Libraries E Documents d Music Pictures E Videos jE Computer amp Local Disk C G Gruppen knet _ r File name v Rack configuration data rck v Fig 236 Selecting creating the rack configuration file a i E Instrument Setup l Detection Channel S 2600 Channeli K Collector Reset Flow ml min acc to Pump S 1050 ki Rack configuration Path C EnterpriseSProjects Gr T estl locahMethodhrack_2013 07 30_1 rck Create Open Fig 237 Fraction Collector Setup with rack configuration path Note If no rack file is selected the method will be interrupted immedi ately after start An appropriate error message will be shown in the INSTRUMENT ACTIVITY LOG click View Instrument Activity Log Refresh FRACTION COLLECTION PROGRAM The editing principles are the same as described for the pump gradient programming reference Some fields are editable whereas others are either only informative without access or you can select the possible options via a drop down list Mobe The single event option is to select for programming a detailed exact fractionation parameter for a single time point whereas the PEAK RECOGNITION can be used to define a fractionation parameter for a time frame which can includes several peaks to be collected Every new detected peak according to the defined thresh
127. e If you click on the button the pretreatment configuration window will open Here you can select the position of the recycling valve if any other device runs a pretreatment The choices are WASTE and SLV RECYCLING Please keep in mind that during a pre treatment no detector signal can be analyzed however if solvent recycling is selected the recycling valve will also switch into this position if any substance will eluate ACTION AT THE END OF RUN This option also in only available if a recycling valve was configured You can decide if it should switch to WASTE or SLV RECYCLING if the run is finished If you select solvent recycling please make sure that only solvent will eluate then Instrument Status Fraction Collector The fraction collector status is shown in two separated tabs one for monitoring the Instrument Status and Direct Control options figure 257 and the other for KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Monitor Direct Con trol 177 OpenLAB Preparative Option the RAcK ViEW figure 258 System Status s 1050 SY s 3950 E JetStream Oven s 2600 E s 3050 FC a 5 1870 107 AOI 1 7O FTO 20O 287 2070 2070 2270 Fig 258 Instrument status Fraction Collector S 3050 Rack view In case of a MultiValve fraction collector both tabs are combined to one figure 259 STATUS The actual operation is displayed It is additionally indicated by the LED color w
128. e detection channel If it is required to control two detector channels use the Vir tual Detector to add the traces of two detector channels into one chromato gram channel trace select then the Virtual Detector as DETECTION CHANNEL KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Advanced Collector Settings 162 OpenLAB Preparative Option Note If no detection channel is selected the method will be interrupted immediately after start An appropriate error message will be shown in the INSTRUMENT ACTIVITY LOG click View Instrument Activity Log Refresh COLLECTOR RESEt This option must be checked for cumulative collection from repeated runs This is only recommended if several runs of the same sample are required it allows collecting the same components from the different runs into the same fraction vials The collector reset will clear the information of already collected fractions from the rack file please refer to the description of the rack file below otherwise the fraction positions are marked as used and will not used in other runs Please note that all information about former frac tion is lost due to the collector reset also the filling level Make sure that the vial volume allow to collect the fractions from all runs because the software cannot not calculate the real filling level and due to that will not switch to the next free vial if the current vial is full ADVANCED COLLECTOR SETTINGS With a click
129. e 84 3 VIALs it is possible to select a source vial for the transport liquid in the method setup later The combination left tray 384 LOw right tray 96 HIGH is not allowed PLATE PROCESS ORDER The vials of the two trays will be processed either in COL UMNS or ROWS order FIRST DESTINATION VIAL Enable this option if you want to use destination vials A destination vial is required for sample mixing or dilution Enter the first destina tion vial position For each injection a destination vial will be used for mixing or diluting Sample and destination vial positions must not been mixed the first destination vial position must be behind the last sample vial position REAGENT A B VIAL Enable these options if you want to use reagent vials Enter the corresponding vial position The selected vials will be used for REAGENT A VIAL and or REAGENT B VIAL for all injections Use Mix amp DILUTE Enable this option to select for each injection one destination reagent A and reagent B vial position This allows a higher number of injec tions if a higher volume of the reagent s is required The Mix amp DILUTE option is KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 50 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems only available if you have selected the same tray type for left and right It is not available for the tray type 84 3 VIALS Tray configuration Left tray type First destination vial 145 192 H Right tray type Reagent
130. e eee eee teens 111 Instrument Setup SIKA Thermometer 0 00 cee ee eee eee 112 SELLING UP AUXIN Traces wi wde eee eae taeda eee eon eden 112 SELLING UP a TIGGER acca cr oeewowsy Stes ete ee awe Pe oe sees 113 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method 106 SV SEC DUALS gigs ge eat gran Seek ze cece 6s Ae aca Goan aR aA he ee ed 106 instrument status PUMPS orre sion ets Boca acl ah a wcle can wt col ey wean We nis ew le 2 109 Instrument Status Detectors 2 25 0044 64 02 cho bh ee ennenr ad aeaed awew es 115 Instrument Status UV Detectors UVD 2 1L UVD 2 18 MW 1 S 2520 S 2550 50D K 2600 5 cee whee eee ee Se eee eat a Rete 115 Instrument Status Diode Array Detectors DAD 6 1L PDA T S 26003 2850 2 ons eia ie wade GREASE WAM RORY CBee SS 119 Instrument Status RI Detectors 2300 2400 04 122 Instrument Status Fluorescence Detector RF 20A Axs 124 Instrument Status User defined Detector 0005 127 Instrument Status Virtual Detector 0 0 eee eee eee eee 128 Instrument Status Assistant ASM 2 1L 2 2 ee ee eee 128 Instrument Status Autosampler 2 0 0 0 eee ee ee ee eee 134 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 5 Table of Contents Instrument Status Autosampler KNAUER Optimas 134 Instrument Status Autosampler 3950 AS 1 2 0200005 135 Instrume
131. e es PREBLE Oe 61 STEUER setup Detectors seus aca ates wad Oho het Obie ee eto em S 70 Instrument Setup RI Detectors S 2300 S 2400 71 Instrument Setup UV Detectors UVD 2 1L UVD 2 15S 10D S 2520 71 Instrument Setup Detectors S 2550 50D MW 1 K 2600 74 Instrument Setup Diode Array Detectors DAD 6 1L DAD 2 1L UV Detector MWD ZIE 5 oe oe Saat tree th hee aia bere eG mde ee Sek RO Gee Ghee at And ae 77 Instrument Setup Diode Array Detectors PDA 1 S 2600 S 2850 81 Instrument Setup Conductivity Monitor 2900 CM 2 18 85 Instrument Setup Fluorescence Detector RF 20A Axs 85 Instrument Setup User Defined Detector 02006 87 Instrument Setup Virtual Detector 0 0 ee ee eee eee 87 Instrument Setup Assistant ASM 2 1L 2 ee ee ee eee 91 Assistant Setup FRC SCUID lt 43 2350 ore dots oie ket Sete cee eae eens 93 Instrument Setup Autosamplers 0 cece eee ee ee teens 93 Instrument Setup Autosampler KNAUER Optimas 94 Instrument Setup Autosampler 3950 Alias AS 1 0 2 97 Instrument Setup Manager I O S 5050 M 1 IF 2 IFU 2 1 105 Instrument Setup Switching Valves 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 106 Instrument Setup Column Thermostat T 1 T 1 Basic JetStream CT 2 1 108 Instrument Setup Flowmeter 2 ce
132. e from the shown list The software will read out the information such as serial number and will fill it automatically into the configuration screen To search for an instrument the device must be connected switched on and must have a valid IP address Optionally you can enter the IP address of your device if the option USE S N To IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT is disabled Please note that in case the device receives the IP address from a DHCP server for example a router the IP address may change if the device is switched off and switched on again KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fraction Collector Instrument Setup 161 OpenLAB Preparative Option Instrument Setup Fraction Collector Analyzing the incoming data for identifying peaks or other events requires sev eral data points Due to this a higher data rate is recommended 5 Hz should be sufficient in most cases On the other hand the online data analyzes in the FRC module requires some time Up to 2 seconds are required for an action as switching the fraction collector if an appropriate event is registered Therefore the FRC option cannot be used for fast HPLC as UHPLC In any system you can include only one fraction collector However the setup window is independent on the configured fraction collector Therefore they will be explained together Note For several functionality of the preparative option an Automation LogOn is required when a separate Sha
133. e is 30 ul for a tube volume of 15 ul In the flushed loop mode this option is deactivated Note Flush volumes smaller than twice the volume of the needle and tub ing will result in a decrease of performance of the autosampler KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Timed Events 95 Creating an Instrument Control Method WASH TIMES Select the Wash times in number of syringe volumes Note that the Needle Wash check box must be selected in order to activate this setting AIR SEGMENT Check the Air Segment box to enable the use of an air segment between the sample and the wash solvent to reduce the amount of flush vol ume HEADSPACE PRESSURE Check the Headspace Pressure box to enable the use of headspace pressure in combination with the syringe to transport sample to the loop The compressor will always be used during a wash procedure Note The accuracy and reproducibility of the autosampler may decrease if HEADSPACE PRESSURE is not selected NEEDLE WASH Check the Needle Wash box to enable a wash procedure ALARM BUZZER Check the Alarm Buzzer box to enable the alarm beep which is emitted when an error occurs during a run RUN SCREENS Check the Run Screens box to display the actual run information on the autosamplers display during a run TEMPERATURE CONTROL If your autosampler is equipped with a tray cooling this option can be checked and the desired temperature can be entered Note The tray cooling al
134. e of all devices of the Assistant ACQUISITION DELAY only for UVD 2 1S ACQUISITION DELAY is the interval between the start of the run Trigger and the time when sampling starts for this detec tor This option will only be shown if a detector is configured in the ASM 2 1L UVD 2 15 This section only appears if the detector UVD 2 1S is configured TIME CONSTANT Select the TIME CONSTANT for the detector from the drop down list The values are 0 00 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 0 and 2 0 seconds Smaller time constants are required for high speed analysis A good rule is to select a time constant which is the reciprocal of the data rate in Hz e g 2 Hz data rate gt 0 5 sec time constant SAMPLING RATE The SAMPLING RATE is the rate at which data is sampled by the sys tem Click on the drop down list for a list of the frequencies available for the configuration of your system The choices are 1 2 5 10 20 and 50 Hz This selection is in Hz data points per second as for most chromatography applica tions We recommend having more than 20 data points per peak 30 40 This means that for a peak with a peak width of 20 seconds from peak start to peak end a data rate of 2 Hz is recommended AUTOZERO AT START Check the Autozero field if you wish the signal to be zeroed at the moment a measurement is started to define the current signal as the baseline AUTOZERO AT WL CHANGE No access to this option The grayed area is only
135. e sample preparation and the injec tion will be made in the instrument activity log A Instrument Activity Log o Refresh Add Manual Entry Print Selection Print All Matthias Matthias 31 07 2013 18 42 48 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Direct Control Virtual FC Time 1 34 min peak recognition settings LBeg 21 000 LEnd Matthias Matthias 31 07 2013 18 42 40 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Inj Module Stacked injection trigger marker is detected in 1 21 min after run start Matthias Matthias 31 07 2013 18 42 33 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Inj Module Stacked injection with inj volume 0 50 ml flow 8 000 ml min duration 0 11 mi Matthias Matthias 31 07 2013 18 42 24 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Direct Control Virtual FC Time 0 93 min Operation Waste Matthias Matthias 31 07 2013 18 42 17 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Inj Module Stacked injection trigger marker is detected in 0 81 min after run start Matthias Matthias 31 07 2013 18 42 16 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Direct Control Virtual FC Time 0 79 min Collect to vial next Matthias Matthias 31 07 2013 18 42 10 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Inj Module Stacked injection with inj volume 0 50 mi flow 8 000 ml min duration 0 11 mi __ Matthias Matthias 31 07 2013 18 41 53 GMT 02 00 PC PM SWTEST 1 Ini Module Stacked injection triqger marker is detected in 0 41 min after run start y T Fig 270 Injection Module Stacked Injections Instrument Activity Log En
136. e the Run Status displays a run time in minutes elapsed since the start of the run AN OuTPUT The actual output signal is indicated in this field KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Direct Con trol 137 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method DIGITAL OUTPUT Event The current state for the digital output will be displayed in this control The On state is represented by an active red Light Emission Diode LED symbol the Off state is represented by an inactive LED symbol i COMMUNICATION INTERFACE Here the selected interface and the communication port will be shown DIRECT CONTROL The output voltage AO MV and the percentage factor values of the AOF can be set The settings become effective by clicking the APPLY but ton resulting in an output voltage AO AOF 100 at the given channel DIGITAL OuTPUT The DIGITAL OUTPUT defines the event possibilities 0 7 and PULSE selectable from the drop down menu The setting becomes effective by clicking the APPLY button Instrument Status KNAUER Switching Valves E Instrument Status EP System Status E S 1050 SJ as Switching Valves ge s 2300 E User Defined Detector y 10 1 Run Status HOLD Valves Status Direct Control Set Position 5 Communication Fig 197 Instrument Status Switching Valves RUN STATUS The RUN STATUS displays a run time in minutes elapsed since the start of the run While the method is not
137. e will appear when a run is started KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Port set tings 35 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Y AXIS UNITS Y AXIS Select the units to be displayed on the y axis of your chro matogram from the drop down list For the UV detectors the choices are AU Absorption Units mAU 0 001 AU or WAU 0 000001 AU The DAD s addi tionally have the option ADC CounTs For the RI detectors the only choice is mRIU and for the spectrofluorometric detector the units are given as a u arbi trary units For the Conductivity Monitor the choise is mS cm FLOW CELL Enter a description for the flow cell you are using The description will be printed out when you print the instrument configuration For the DAD 6 1L you can choose between 3 mm 2 ul 10 mm 2 ul 10 mm 10 ul 50mm 6 ul Test cell and Fiber optics If the detector settings will be read out by using the Auto Configuration or the three dot button the stored flow cell will be filled Due to that there is no flow cell detection you can change the flow cell type in the software as well in the detector Make sure that the installed flow cell type is set correctly in the software and in the detector HALOGEN LAMP not available for all detectors Check this box when the detec tor is equipped with a halogen lamp If you have read out a detector equipped with halogen lamp the option will not be enabled automatically Please be sure that
138. ee ee ee eee 59 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 191 Table of Figures Instrument Wizard online 0 0 ee ee ee ee ee 59 Overview Instrument setup window Smartline Autosampler 3950 60 Instrument Setup pump S 1050 P 2 1L P 1 isocratic 61 Instrument Setup pump S 1050 P 2 1L P 1 LPG 61 Instrument Setup pump P 2 1L isobar 61 Instrument Setup pump P 4 15S P 2 18 10P 20P S 100 HPG 62 Instrument Setup pump P 4 1S P 2 1S 10P 20P S 100 isocratic 62 Instrument Setup pump P 6 1L constant pressure 62 Instrument Setup pump P 6 1L constant flow 62 Pressure limits in pump setup window 0 0 eee ee 63 Error message when pressure limits are out of range 63 Setup for P 6 1L Hold Max Pressure 2 0 eee ee ee eee 63 Solvent type settings for pumps S 1050 P2 1 P IL 64 Pretreatment setting dialog b
139. ee eee eee 43 Configuration windows left device tab device type selection 44 Autosampler 3950 configuration window 48 46 Available interfaces Smartline autosampler 3950 47 LAN interface dialog cee ee eee eee ee 47 Tray configuration for the autosamplers 3950 AS 1 48 Tray configuration 84 3 vials for the autosampler 3950 49 Tray configuration autosamplers 3950 AS 1 with option Use Mix amp Di UG coe e ae hee bas eh ewes Gee coed oo eee a4 eee noes oes 50 Autosampler KNAUER Optimas configuration window 51 Tray configuration for the autosampler KNAUER Optimas 52 Switching Valves configuration window 206 53 Available interfaces KNAUER Switching Valves 53 LAN interface dialog ee eee ee eee ee ee 53 Configuration window for the Manager S 5050 or M 1 IF 2 IFU 2 1 54 Thermostat CT 2 1 configuration window 06 55 Thermostat T 1 Basic and Jetstream configuration window 55 Thermostat T 1configuration window 2 200 55 Available interfaces column thermostat T 1 56 LAN interlace dialog sis kcceeddaeeeeteeeadageee abe gend ees 56 GJC Flowmeter configuration window 20e eee 57 Bronkhorst Flowmeter configuration window 57 SIKA thermometer configuration window 0008 58 Instrument Wizard offline cee
140. eg eiealtnad 6 General Information on OpenLAB 0 eee ee ee eee 6 SUDPOTCd DEVICES aagana ri ste buenas eee a EEEE shane eee 7 SCAN AUIOM 3 6 area te Ratan E oo ieee toe eens ape eae 9 KNAUER Drivers and Extensions 0 2 eee eee ee ee eee ees 9 KNAUER Fraction Collectors Addon 0 eee eee eee eee 12 Generic Drivers Installation i 72 3aN teas tobe eee yeh een da we nen aes 13 UNC STASI 9 5 F anticcar dc ck a Sections Gti aes See ia OF Ged See eae oe eS 13 Install Licenses for OpenLAB EE 1 ee ee ee eee 14 HIVE OO AUC 6 4 8 cia ah ears nde wee a a ahie waite eh eek Teak Go ae 15 Mobile Control with OpenLAB 02 e eee eee ee eee 16 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems 17 The Open AB Control Panel vx osenccw crew Seow kee ow a Seas EES 17 Creauing ARTO E E 44 0 nak od wae ee oa wee eels 17 Overview of Instrument Control 0 eee ee ee eee 18 Configuration Device Communication Port 002 eee 18 Configuring the Interface a 2 4 52 ao ec eeS meme dh tae bathe eee oh Gauee 18 KNAUER Interface Configuration 2 ee eee ee eee ene 19 Configuring the KNAUER HPLC System 0 0 cee eee ee ee eee 20 Instrument Configuration 0 cee ee ne eee e eee 21 Configuration KNAUER HPLC System 2 2 21 Configuration KNAUER Pumps 0 0 e ee eee eee eee 22 Configuration KNAUER D
141. el Help Lok Fig 74 Thermostat T 1configuration window Thermo NAME Enter a descriptive name for the thermostat This name will appear on stat Config the thermostat tab when the instrument setup or status windows are dis uration played Use a name which is unique within the instrument KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Interface Thermo stat Config uration 56 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems SERIAL NUMBER Type in the serial number of the device you are using TEMP UNITS T 1 CT 2 1only Select from the drop down list either C or F INTERFACE Select the number of the RS 232 communication port COM PORT on the PC to which the column thermostat is connected JetStream and T 1 Basic Select RS 232 or LAN for communication with the device T 1 Interface A i ooo o or R5 232 i LNO E SS ee Fig 75 Available interfaces column thermostat T 1 RS 232 Select the number of the RS 232 communication port COM PorT on the PC to which the column thermostat is connected LAN T 1 CT 2 1 Interface LAN ki HJ Obtained using S M IP Fort 10001 Use S N to identify the instrument Fig 76 LAN interface dialog To let the software search for your already connected and switched on device click on the button to start the search for all LAN connected devices of the currently configured type For this the option USE S N TO IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT must
142. emperature C 4 Current ial Tray Temperature C Start Needle Wash Advance tray Serial Fot COM4 C SN 110024 Fig 194 Instrument Status Autosampler KNAUER Optimas Monitor AS STATUS The status Ready is displayed when the autosampler is waiting to perform an injection If an injection program is running the actual program step will be indicated After a completed injection the status is described as Analysis timer running during the chromatographic run CURRENT VIAL The actual position of the injection needle is shown TRAY TEMPERATURE If the tray cooling option has been installed and configured the actual tray temperature will be shown Direct Con DIRECT CONTROL The direct control features are not accessible during an injec trol tion TRAY TEMPERATURE If the cooling option is installed and configured the tray tem perature can be set The entered value will be transferred to the sampler by clicking the APPLY button ON OFF The ON OFF button can be used for enabling disabling the cooling control The labeling of the button changes with the actual status START NEEDLE WASH Click on this button to force the autosampler to perform the needle wash ADVANCE TRAY Clicking briefly on this button will move the tray to the next posi tion KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 135 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Instrument Status Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Syste
143. etectors 2 0 0 2 eee ee ee eee 28 RES2OAIAKS tnsci5 ode SS Vat eh ea So Ray ee eae ees 36 Configuration User Defined Detectors 0 ce eee eee eee 37 Configuration Virtual Detector sesos sesona aaa ee ee eee 39 Detector COMMECUIOMINS sss a sessed ace ve a E amp aint seule Bach e E shh het Bh hy Bees 39 Trigger Signal Connections 0 cee eee ee eee ee 40 Autozero Signal Connections eee ee ee ee eens 41 Configuration Assistant ASM 2 1L 1 2 ee ee ee 41 Configuration Autosampler 0 eee eee ee ee eee 46 Configuration Autosampler 3950 AS 1 2 0 2 0 eee eee eee 46 Configuration Autosampler KNAUER Optimas 51 Configuration miscellaneous Instruments 2 002 eee 52 Configuration Switching Valves 0 2 ee eee ee ee eee 52 Configuration Managers S 5050 M 1 Interface Box IF 2 IFU 2 1 54 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 4 Table of Contents Configuration Thermostat T 1 T 1 Basic JetStream CT 2 1 55 CONMOUI AU ON FIOWMELER i sick acu a co4s A wih ola yeaa when Ye ei wien was aa 57 Configuration SIKA Thermometer 2 ee eee ee eee eee 58 Creating an Instrument Control Method 59 MISCEUIMEMDCLUD 2 4 6 eared sto ete eee a eee he ee anaes 60 Instrument SELUD PUMPS a2 6 od ate de be as via a ale ee
144. evice Type Assistant 44 Digital Output 67 Do not wash needle Autosampler 103 Do not wash the needle Autosampler 102 Dowload Tab 145 Dtector Time Constant 70 E Emission Fluorescence Detector 86 End DAD Detector 83 Detector 75 Events UV Detector 73 Excitation Fluorescence Detector 86 Ext Trigger ON Virtual Detector 88 External Source Virtual detector 89 F Fill Down Autosampler 104 Fill Table Autosampler 104 First Destination Vial Autosampler 3950 49 Optimas 52 OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 200 Index Flow Cell Detector 35 Flowmeter Capacity Limit 57 Capacity Mode 57 Configuration 57 Instrument Setup 111 Name 57 Serial Number 57 Serial Port 57 Y Axis Units 57 Fluorescence Detector At the end of run 86 Emission 86 Excitation 86 Gain 86 Output Mode 86 Recorder Range 86 Sensitivity 86 87 Time 86 Wavelength Program 86 Flush Volume Autosampler 94 98 Fraction Collector Collector Reset 162 Detection channel 161 Fraction Collector Program 165 Interface 155 Local Maximum 172 Local Minimum 172 Mode 165 Peak Recognition 165 Peak Recycling 156 Rack configuration Path 163 Recycling valve 156 Solvent Recycling 156 Tubing parameters 155 Fraction collector Configuration 153 Instrument Setup 161 FRC Control Option Installation 12 Full loop Autosampler 98 G Gain Fluorescence Detector 86 Gernerics Drivers 150 Gradient Mode 10P 24 P 2 1L 24 P 2 1S 4 1S
145. ew 177 Instrument status MultiValve fraction collector 179 Instrument Setup Fraction collector Running method 180 FRC Annotation Chromatogram 2 02 eee eee 180 Chromatogram FRC Appearance 2 eee eee 181 Injection module configuration window 182 Instrument Setup Injection module 0008 183 Injection module Stacked injection table 184 Injection module Stacked injections table setup 184 Injection Module Stacked injection table 185 Injection Module Stacked injections auxiliary trace 186 Injection Module Stacked injections trace 186 Injection Module Stacked Injections Instrument Activity Log Entry 186 Injection Module status window initial injection 187 Injection module Stacked injections table setup 188 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 196 Index Index Numerics 10D Instrument Setup 71 10P Gradient Mode 24 Instrument Setup 61 Interface 24 Name 24 RS 232 25 3950 Alias Instrument Setup 97 3rd column Assistant 92 4th column Assistant 93 A Acquire 3D data DAD Detector 83 Detector 75 Acquisition channel on Detector 70 Acquisition Delay Detector 71 Acquisition delay Assistant 91 Add Autosampler 96 101 Add Info Switching Valves 54 Add Valve Info Switching Valves 54 Add Info
146. figuration 55 Jetstream Instrument Setup 108 K KNAUER Optimas Configuration 51 L Lamp OFF at the end of run DAD Detector 81 LAN Autosampler 3950 47 Detector 34 Pump 25 Switching Valves 53 Thermostat 56 Leak Sensor Level Thermostat 57 Leak Sensor Sens Thermostat 57 Leak Sensor Sensitivity Assistant 43 Detector 35 Pump 27 Left Device Assistant 45 Left tray type Autosampler 3950 49 Left Valve Column Thermostat 109 Thermostat 56 Loop Volume Autosampler 3950 47 Optimas 51 Lower Limit Column Thermostat 110 M M 1 Channel 20 Configuration 19 Configure box 19 Instrument Setup 105 Manufacturer and Model 20 Number of boxes 19 Range 20 Serial number 19 Serial Port 20 Manager Device number 55 I O Name 54 Interface 54 Output 55 Pump Program 105 Manager 5050 Channel 20 Configuration 54 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 202 Index Configure box 19 Interface Configuration 19 Manufacturer and Model 20 Number of boxes 19 Range 20 Serial number 19 Serial Portr 20 Manager M 1 Configuration 54 Manufacturer and Model Interface Box 20 M 1 20 Manager 5050 20 Max Assistant 92 Max Pressure Mode Pump 63 Maximum Pressure Pump 63 Method 145 Method Type Autosampler 96 Method type Autosampler 95 100 Middle Device Assistant 45 Min Assistant 92 Minimum Pressure Pump 63 Miscellaneous Instruments Configuration 52 Mix Autosampler 97 101 Mix Methods A
147. for a gradient program will be automatically transferred to the gradient programs of all the pumps which form this HPG system This does not affect the event configuration which can be setup for all pumps independently For most fields the software checks if the values are in an allowed range This will be done either if you change to another menu or if you try to save the method In most cases you find at the bottom a unique graph part displaying the wave length flow gradient or other related profiles With a right hand mouse click it is possible to access multiple setup possibilities of the profile For details see the OpenLAB Data System User Manual or Online help FLOW OFF AT THE END OF RUN Pumps P 1 S 100 P 2 1S P 4 18 10P 20P only Upon selecting this option the flow will be set to zero after the run time has elapsed STANDBY AT THE END OF RUN Pumps S 1050 P 2 1L P 6 1L P 1 only Upon selecting this option the pumps will switch into standby after the run time has elapsed at the end of run Standby Fig 98 Possible action at the end of run for pumps S 1050 P 2 1L P 6 1L P 1 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 70 Creating an Instrument Control Method Instrument Setup Detectors Note An ignited detector lamp is mandatory for a run start Therefore for a configured and enabled detector the lamp must be started before a run is started The detector tab contains several areas w
148. for the other KNAUER pumps are nearly identical NAME The name of the selected pump appears automatically You can enter any other descriptive name for the pump This name will appear on the pump tab when the instrument setup or status windows are displayed Note Use a name which is unique within the instrument configuration For instance for a high pressure gradient system all pumps must have different names NAME TyPE accessible for Pumps 10P 20P P 2 1S P 4 1S only Select the type of pump you want to configure from the drop down list The choices are 10P 20P P 2 15 and P 4 15 The 10P P 2 1S is the device without the pressure sensor As already described in the Name section above you must use different names for all of the devices in an instrument configuration Gradient Made Gradient Mode Isocratic Isocrate Use Constant F LPG HPG Fig 27 Selection options for gradient modes Head GRADIENT MODE Select the desired gradient mode from the drop down list Please note that for Pumps P 1 S 1050 and P 2 1L the gradient mode must correspond to the gradient mode set in the pump The LPG option is not avail able for pumps 100 10P 20P P 2 1S and P 4 1S pumps The SOBAR mode is only available for the pump P 2 1L it allows runing the isocratic pump at a constant pressure with variable flow rate CONSTANT PRESSURE MODE This mode is only available for Pump P 6 1L The Con stant Pressure Mode allows runni
149. from the drop down list The choices are NONE MANUAL and EXTERNAL NONE Time program s and Sampling start immediately after clicking on Start Sequence acquisitions do not pause between runs This trigger type is not rec ommended for chromatography runs Due to that the devices program start at different times because there is not start signal also the retention time of the peaks will shifting between different runs MANUAL Operator must press ENTER to start the run Sequence acquisitions pause for confirmation between runs This type is recommended if there is not device that can send a trigger signal As an alternative a virtual detector and EXTERNAL trigger can be used for triggering EXTERNAL Program execution and data sampling are started from an external trigger if this option is selected Further settings are not necessary Sequence acquisitions pause for external trigger signal between runs Note If you use a manual injection valve with trigger connection you must switch the injection valve to position LOAD before the run is finished KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 106 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Instrument Status of a Running Control Method If you have the KNAUER drivers and extensions installed and your instrument is configured as a KNAUER HPLC System the device status and the direct control functions appear as part of the Instrument Status section in your Instrument wi
150. g 200 Instrument Status Column Thermostat Jetstream Note For the Jetstream Column Thermostat and the Column Thermostat CT 2 1 the keypad must display Choose Function so that connec tion may be established and commands from the software may be carried out by the oven KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Monitor Direct Con trol 140 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method RUN STATUS The status HOLD is displayed when no program is running other wise the Run Status displays a run time in minutes elapsed since the start of the run STATE T 1 Basic and Jetstream only The status On Idle or Off is indicated depending on whether the oven is controlled or not respectively TEMPERATURE The actual oven temperature is shown PosT COLUMN TEMP T 1 only The actual post column temperature will be shown VALVES POSITION T 1 only The actual valve s position is shown if the thermo stat is equipped with valves COMPARTMENT DOOR T 1 only If the door of the thermostat is OPEND the state is represented by an active red Light Emission Diode LED symbol while the CLOSED state is represented by an inactive LED symbol 3 Additionally the door status will be shown in letters OPENED CLOSED If the door will be opened during a run an entry into the Instrument Activity Log will be made EVENTS Digital Outs T 1 only The current status for the digital outs will be displayed in this contro
151. gital 3 sec Attenuation 1 Acquisition wavelengthEy 5 s F r Ei myn mgo WavelengthE Error in control script line 9 Gain 50 Value 50 is out of range 1 10 100 Acquisition LO 0 ASGCuasieton WavelengthEX 240 nm WavelengthEM 400 nm x lt L gt Property Type Description Ranges AutoZero command Do autozero Acquisition Fluorescence D ataR ate property Acquisition data rate for the trace e be RS a i O d Acquisition Fluorescence lsOn property Set to true to start data acquisition for this channel false true Wavelenall property Current excitation wavelength 200 nm 890 nm WavelengthEM property Current emission wavelength Gain property Current gain FilterRC property Defines response time set by RC filter FilterDigital property Defines response time set by digital filter Attenuation property Defines attenuation value 32 64 128 256 For Help press F1 Min Fig 218 Instrument setup programming window example Jasco FP 920 After completing the generic driver program an instrument tab as for any other instrument will be displayed in the instrument status tab f Jasco FP 920 Method untitled met Data None Project Default Ins I m File Edit wiew Method Data Sequence Analysis Control Reports Window Help a GF E a e GA amp 1 Fluorescence e kn sf a System Status J s1000 J FP 920 Ex WL 240 nm EM WL 400 n
152. guration 22 Analysis options Window 00 eee ee eee eee 22 Pump S 1050 P 1 configuration window 2 23 Pump 10P 20P P 2 1S P 4 1S configuration window 23 Pump P 2 1L configuration window 2 e eee 23 Pump P 6 1L configuration window 2 e ee eee 24 Selection options for gradient modes 02 6 24 Available interfaces pumps S 1050 S 100 10P 20P P 1 P 2 1S P 4 1S 25 LAIN mMer ace didog ads rakera t Eeee ee nee oe eee eet 25 LAN interface Device Information window 26 Pump Configuration Setup window of pump S 1050 P 1 P 2 1L 27 Additional information box 0 eee eee eee eee 28 Detector DAD 6 1L configuration window 206 28 DAD 2 1L configuration window 0 eee eee eee 29 MWD 2 1L configuration window 2 2 ee ee eee 29 Detector UVD 2 1L configuration window 206 29 Detectors 10D UVD 2 1S configuration window 30 Detector S 2520 configuration Window 02006 30 Detector S 2550 MW 1 configuration window 30 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig
153. guration Injection Module 2 eee eee ee eee 181 Instrument Setup Injection Module 2 0 cee eee eee 183 Simulation of Stacked Injections 0 ee eee eee eee 186 Instrument Status Injection module 2 eee ee eee 187 Taple O FIGU CS 4 5 aca a erere 8 See ual oe be ent ot ae eee eee Ge 189 E sen tasd s t Sin thd ee Se hee hee es a a ee ee ne ae 196 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 6 General Definitions General Definitions Using this Manual The first chapter of this manual describes the installation of OpenLAB followed by the system configuration method setup and status The Fraction Collector and the Injection Module are described in the section on the preparative option Additional notes in the left margin support the menu Menu options or software commands are set in italic capitals General Information on OpenLAB OpenLAB is a laboratory software suite from Agilent Technologies It includes OpenLAB Chromatography Data System CDS OpenLAB Electronic Lab Notebook ELN OpenLAB Scientific Data Management System SDMS There are two versions of the OpenLAB CDS software The EZChrom Edition and the ChemStation Edition The OpenLAB EZChrom Edition OpenLAB EE is the successor of KNAUER s ChromGate CDS This manual describes the KNAUER extensions for OpenLAB EZChrom Edition The KNAUER extensions for OpenLAB EZChrom Ed
154. h change during a run No ACTION AT THE END OF RUN S 2550 MW 1 ONLY Upon selecting this option no action will take place after the run time has elapsed LAMP OFF AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option the lamp s will switch off after the run time has elapsed Please note that if the lamp s are switched off no run can be started the software cannot switch on the lamp s automat ically before starting a run You must switch on the lamp s manually using the INSTRUMENT STATUS DIRECT CONTROL option or directly in the detector s own menu only available if the detector is not under software control Beside this there is an option programming a Lamp On in the Runtime Settings please refer to the matching chapter page 142 STANDBY AT THE END OF RUN S 2550 MW 1 ONLY Upon selecting this option the detector will switch into standby after the run time has elapsed Please note that if a detector is in Standby mode no run can be started the software can not wake up the device automatically before starting a run You must wake up the device manually using the STANDBY option in the CONTROL menu or directly via the detector s display Beside this there is an option programming a WAKE UP AND LAMP ON in the RUNTIME SETTINGS please refer to the matching chapter page 142 Note If the lamp s is are switched off by the method and the detector is then switched off upon switching the detector on again the lamp s will remain
155. h the time of the current injection duration is shown During the run the run status shows the run time Pump Flow Shows the current flow rate of the injection module s pump PUMP PRESSURE Shows the current pressure of the injection module s pump This option is only shown if the pump is equipped with a pressure transducer VIAL POSITION The vial position can be either L Load or Inject If no sample loop is used that means that the sample will be injected directly on the column the vial position during the injection while the injection mod ule s pump is running is Inject If the injection is made the valve will switch into L Load position If a sample loop is used the valve will switch to L Load position if the pump is running and fill the sample loop For the injection the valve will switch to Inject position PumP Flow During a run the pump cannot be controlled using the pump flow option The buttons Stop and Flow Apply will be inaccessible gt gt If the option DIRECT CONTROL DURING A RUN is enabled after the initial injec tion the button is accessible If you click on the button the known stacked injection setup with the default values will open This is allowed to cre ate a modified stacked injection table The setup works as described for the instrument setup of the injection module KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 188 OpenLAB Preparative Option Stacked I
156. hEX 240 nm WavelengthEM 400 nm Acquisition Fluorescence IsOn true Start data acquis 20 0 Acquisition Fluorescence IsOn false Stop data acquisi WavelengthEX 240 nm WavelengthEM 400 nm v lt l gt Type Description Ranges AutaZero command Do autozero Acquisition Fluorescence DataRiate property Acquisition data rate for the trace Shes ee ee a Acquisition Fluorescence lsOn property Set to true to start data acquisition for this channel false true WavelengthEX property Current excitation wavelength 200 nm 890 nm WavelengthEM property Current emission wavelength 210 nm 900 nm Gain property Current gain 10 100 1000 FilterRC property Defines response time set by RC filter tandard Slow FilterDigital property Defines response time set by digital filter z 10 20 40 Attenuation property Defines attenuation value g t2 n g 16 a2 M64 126 250 For Help press F1 MIN Fig 217 Instrument setup programming window example Jasco FP 920 r Jasco FP 920 Method untitled met Data None Project Default Instrument Setup E x Aa amp 1 Fluorescence N SSH BS eke sas el D gt p gt Tr AS P S s1000 J FP 920 lt Aux Traces SX Trigger Instrument control script which will be executed during the method run a WavelengthEX 240 nm WavelengthEM 400 nm Gain 50 FilterRC Standard Use one of Filter FilterDi
157. he maximum data rate can only be achieved when connected and configured via LAN Using RS 232 connection the maximum data rate is 10 Hz KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Detector Instrument Setup 73 Creating an Instrument Control Method Note You should switch the lamp on manually before you start the next working session After power up allow 30 minutes for the lamp to stabilize before running samples that may require sensitive mea surements WAVELENGTH PROGRAM In the wavelength table detector parameter changes to be executed during a run can be defined in a time based table The table has columns for TIME in min WAVELENGTH s in nm and EVENTS detectors UVD 2 1L S 2520 In the first row at time 0 00 min enter the initial wave length s in nm The editing principle is the same as for the time gradient program described in the chapter Pump PROGRAM EVENTS DIGITAL OUTPUTS UVD 2 1L S 2520 only Configure the events by pressing the button which is displayed when you place the cursor on the EVENTS cell The following dialog will appear Events Digital Outputs Control Events 1 Relay Of 27TL or 2TTL lor 4 28 Of Fig 102 Configuring Events Digital Outputs Control The EVENTS Digital Outputs correspond to the outputs available on the rear panel of the detector Select the state for each Event you want to set from the drop down list The choices are OFF 0
158. height mr _ Enable tray thermostating Wait with tolerance C 5 Mix methods 4 Stacked injections Fig 137 Instrument Setup autosampler 3950 AS 1 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Autosam pler Instru ment Setup 98 Creating an Instrument Control Method Select the injection method by clicking on one of the available options FULL LOOP PARTIAL LOOPFILL Or jul PICK UP If ul pick up is selected a drop down menu for the Transport vial position TRANSPORT POS only 3950 becomes available The minimum injection volume for the AS 1 is 1 ul The value can be entered in 1 ul increments The minimum injection volume for the 3950 is 0 1 ul with firmware version 1 15 The value can be entered in 0 1 ul increments Autosampler 3950 with older firmware only supports a minimum injection vol vume of 1 ul and 1 ul increments The maximum programmable injection vol umes FULL LOOP Flushed loop is equal to the loop volume As more sample than the loop volume is needed to completely fill the loop the tube volume must also be filled the loop is automatically flushed 3 x loop volume loop volumes lt 100 ul 2 x loop volume loop volumes from 100 ul to 500 ul 1 5 loop volume loop volumes gt 500 ul PARTIAL LOOPFILL the injection volume is 50 of the programmed loop vol ume uL PICK UP the injection volume can be calculated with the following for mula injection volume lo
159. here you can define the acquisition Some of them are independent on type and model of the detector Acquisition channel on Time constant 10 Sec Sampling rate 1 Hz Suitable for minimum peak width at base 0 3330 Min Run time 10 kin Acquisition delay 0 Min Fig 99 Detector type independent settings ACQUISITION CHANNEL ON detector S 2300 S 2400 S 2900 CM 2 1S RF 20A Virtual Detector only Check the ACQUISITION CHANNEL ON box to enable data acquisition from the detector At least one detector channel must be enabled to start a run If the aforementioned detector is the only configured and active detector the check box may be not accessible TIME CONSTANT Select the time constant for the detector from the drop down list The time constant space is a smoothing factor for the detector signal The selection 0 00 10 00 seconds depends on the detector type A higher value will result in a smoother baseline less noise than with smaller time constant but also in a lower peak area Smaller time constants are required for high speed analysis A good rule is to select a time constant which is the reciprocal of the data rate in Hz e g 2 Hz data rate gt 0 5 sec time constant Note that a high time constant may decrease the peak area SAMPLING RATE The sampling rate used to acquire your data determines how much information the integration algorithm has for drawing and integrating the chromatogram The units
160. ice date Last service code Board working time Serial number Firmware version Thermostat working time Post Column Cooling working time RFID Serial number Firmware version Valve left Valve right Drive serial number Valve serial number Firmware version Firmware date Switch number Columns Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 OL GLP Info T 1 with valves and 4 columns RFID Serial number Firmware version Valve left Valve right Drive serial number Valve serial number Firmware version Firmware date Switch number Serial number Type Storage conditions User Dimensions Particles size Max pressure Max temperature Application number Number of injections Columns Column 1 6 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 142 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Device CT 2 1 Instrument data Serial number Firmware version Instrument installation date Last service date Board working time COLUMNS Pressing the COLUMNS button will read out the available column information of compatible KNAUER columns via RFID The columns must be connected to the RFID terminal strip gt Pressing the gt button will open a menu which allows to enter for compatible KNAUER columns via RFID the storage conditions max 19 digits and a user name max 11 digits By pressing the S 7 button this information will be send to the RFID The columns must be con
161. ick the Commit button to complete the operation DELETE Click the Delete button to delete the selected step When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument setup TRANSPORT Pos only available for uL PICK UP with tray type 84 3 VIALS Select the position of the vial with the transport liquid Available are vials 85 86 and 87 The transport plug is 2 5 x needle volume needle volume tubing vol ume please refer to the autosampler configuration chapter page 46 The autosampler itself calculates the liquid level in the transport vials It will be reset to 8000 ul every time if the autosampler is switched off and on Additionally the level can be reset from the autosamplers direct control tab The level can not be read out from the software If the autosampler calculates that the vial is KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Stacked Injections 102 Creating an Instrument Control Method empty the method sequence will stopped Dependent from the transport liq uid level the autosampler will adapt the needle immersion depth Therefore it is important to fill the transport vials whenever the autosampler was switched off or the transport liquid level was reset manually If a vial is selected as the transport vial the configuration of the vial as a Reagent A or B vial will be ignored STACKED INJECTIONS The option STACKED INJECTIONS enables the definition of additional injections during a
162. ics Scan nm mas range 00 900 nm Star 200 End 600 Spectrum type Emission Excitation nm 254 Scanning speed 600 rina rnir Output mode Excitation energy Autozero Lamp On Sensitivity Low Recorder range x1 Lamp Off Gain Analog output Signal a u Wavelength nm Fig 184 Diagnostics window of Fluorescence Detector RF 20Axs SCAN nm This area is used to specify spectral parameters used for your test measurements Set the START and EnD values within the given limits according to your needs START END SCAN The scan range sets the limits for the test scan The maximum range is defined by the device specification SPECTRUM TYPE Select the excitation or emission spectrum from the drop down menu Depending on your choice the field description will change with the selection you can enter either the EMISSION wavelength or the EXCITATION wave length SCAN Clicking this button will start the diagnostic measurement It will take some time depending on your scan range and speed settings During the scan the info PLEASE WAIT will blink in the head bar The spectrum will be displayed after finishing the scan SCANNING SPEED Select a value between 24 and 3000 nm min from the drop down menu SENSITIVITY GAIN OUTPUT MODE RECORDER RANGE Select the SENSITIVITY level HIGH MED LOW the GAIN 1 4 16 and the OUTPUT MODE EMISSION NOT CORRECTED EXCITATION ENERGY LIGHT SOURCE CORRECTE
163. ient Components gt a A 100 B 0 Gradient Apply Components c 9 D z 0 Events Control Pressure Limits MPa Min 0 0 Max 0 0 Apply Refresh GLP Events 00000000 an Events Apply LAN 172 16 6 101 10001 SN 444093600007 Purge Fig 165 Instrument status pump S 1050 P 1 P 6 1L LPG mode The tab consists of two main parts the Monitor and the Direct Control areas RUN STATUS The status HOLD is displayed when no program is running other wise the Run Status displays a run time in minutes elapsed from the start of the run During a Pretreatment the pump status is EQUILIBRATING FLOW ml min The actual flow is indicated in this field PRESSURE UNITS The highlighted actual pressure is shown framed by the set tings for the allowed minimum and maximum pressures COMPONENTS In case of gradient systems HPG or LPG the percentage of components is shown during the run The components are also indicated by the multi colored bar In the case of isocratic systems the bar is completely red colored showing 100 EVENTS Digital Outputs The current state for each Event Digital Output is displayed in this control The On state is represented by a red active Light Emis sion Diode LED symbol the Off state including waiting for pulse is repre sented by an inactive gray LED symbol _ REFRESH GLP This section only available with conne
164. indows explorer for you to browse directories and files on this disc 2013 Wissenschaftliche Geratebau Dr Ing Herbert Knauer GmbH Fig 1 KNAUER installer start window The links allow for installing the KNAUER drivers and extensions FRC Addon and Generic drivers onto the already installed OpenLAB EZChrom Edition If required also the KNAUER UHPLC Method Converter can be installed Note For all installation work login with administrator access Before the installation switch off all running programs especially anti virus software In Windows 7 you must confirm that the software should be installed KNAUER Drivers and Extensions The KNAUER DRIVERS AND EXTENSIONS installer includes drivers from KNAUER excluding fraction collectors and the injection device and additionally the extensions as the Runtime Settings and Validation of Integration Installing the KNAUER DRIVERS AND EXTENSIONS allows for controlling all supported KNAUER devices and some devices from third party manufacturers KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 10 Installation 1 To install KNAUER DRIVERS AND EXTENSIONS click on the link INSTALL KNAUER DRIVERS AND EXTENSIONS F Knauer HPLC System InstallShield Wizard SS Fig 2 KNAUER installer start window 2 The components which should be installed can be selected in the next win dow As default all components which OpenLAB EE supports are selected It is rec
165. information will not saved Instrument installation date 01 01 2001 Last service date 01 01 2001 Last service code 0 Device working time 43 0 h Fig 182 GLP Information Conductivity Monitor CM 2 1S Instrument data Serial number Firmware version Sensor Type Sensor serial number pH Sensor serial number Instrument installation date Last service date Last service code Device working time Instrument Status Fluorescence Detector RF 20A Axs Auhozero Fig 183 Instrument Status Fluorescence Detector RF 20Axs Note The detector RF 20A Axs must be set into serial mode to be con trolled by software Please refer the configuration part for detailed information page 36 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 125 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method STATUS The status HOLD is displayed when no program is running otherwise the Run Status displays a run time in minutes elapsed from the start of the run The actual EXCITATION wavelength EMISSION wavelength SIGNAL value SENSITIV ITY GAIN and the selected output mode are displayed in their respective fields DIRECT CONTROL All settings you have entered in this area will become effective after clicking on the Set button To achieve changes during a run the direct control option must be activated see Fig 203 on page 142 EXCITATION EMISSION You can enter the values of the excitation and emission wavelengths SENSITIVITY
166. ing Use as reference for correction of next events Ref Spectrum Similarity masimum 1 Action Collect To ka next position 141 Expected interval min Fig 249 Fraction Collection Program Peak Recognition Spectral Similarity Parameters Additionally you must select the desired reference spectrum Clicking on will open the selection window H Open Reference Spectrum Look in Documents r E a pr E Mame Date modified Type No items match your search 4 File name Files of type Spectrum data spc E Open as read only Fig 250 Spectrum selection window The option spectral similarity can only be used if the system is equipped with a DAD After closing the window the parameter will be designated as SimM SIM or SIM for peak recognition EVENT If the mode SINGLE EVENT is selected you can also use local maxima or minima to LOCAL MAXI define action conditions These settings are not available in the peak recogni MUM tion mode To identify a local maximum or minimum at least 15 data points LOCAL MINI MUM KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fraction Collector Instrument Setup 173 OpenLAB Preparative Option will be analyzed However using one of these options a high data rate is required FC Parameters at 6 00 min Signal i Relative to previous event min O Local M axiniurn F C Use as reference for correcti
167. ion INPUT of the interface device The input refers to the interface s channel Click OK Note It is not possible to use a channel twice in a system A data acquisi tion channel cannot be used for control commands such as wave length changes Y AXIS UNITS Fill in the units of your signal to be displayed on the y axis e g microvolt uV AU MPa etc depending on the detector type An interface device acquires your analog signal and stores it in uV If you want to store and to display the signal in different units you must use the appropriate multiplier see below Y AXIS MULTIPLIER OpenLAB by default stores a signal in microvolt If you wish to display another unit enter the conversion factor to be applied The following table shows commonly used y axis labels and their corresponding multipliers Y Axis Label Y Axis Multiplier Millivolt 0 001 Other Enter a number such that when multi plied by microvolt gives you the desired units For example if you want to label the units and each unit corresponds to 5 microvolt of signal enter 1 5 0 2 Please also note that the Multiplier also will be used for the Y Axis Offset Y AXIS OFFSET Type in the correction offset which will be used for the signal recalculation The Y Axis Offset must be given in the same units as the Y axis is labeled Consider the formula DU displayed units DU MS Y M Y O MS measured signal in uV Y M Y Axis Multiplier Y O Y Axis Off
168. ional option independent from the selected gradient In addition to this P 6 1L also allows to adjust the behavior once the selected maximum pressure is reached Either the pump can be switched off as know from all other pumps or the flow can be decreased to proceed with the run Therefore the setup for the CONSTANT PRESSURE ISOBAR MODE is different for both pumps CONTROL PRESSURE LIMITS MPa bar psi P 2 1L P 6 1L only If in the instrument configuration the Constant Pressure Mode for the pump P 6 1L or the gradient mode Isobar for the pump P 2 1L is selected the setup windows have a differ ent appearance Set the desired pressure range for this operating mode Please note that the pressure cannot be held at an absolute unique value therefore a pressure range must be entered The allowed absolute minimum and maxi mum depend on the selected pump head CONTROL FLOW LIMITS ml min P 2 1L P 6 1L only If in the instrument configu ration the Constant Pressure Mode for the pump P 6 1L or the gradient mode Isobar for the pump P 2 1L is selected the setup windows have a different appearance Set the allowed flow range for this operating mode The allowed absolute minimum and maximum depend on the selected pump head PUMP PROGRAM In the pump program pump parameter changes to be exe cuted during a run can be defined in a time based table The pump table has columns for TIME in min FLOW in ml min PRESSURE only P 2 1L P 6 1L in
169. is shown Similarly the relevant data for all included instruments will be displayed e g the actual switching positions in the case of the valves The single instrument tabs of this window provide more detailed information On these tabs you also have the possibility of directly controlling the individual instruments This is even possible while a method is running however this option must be enabled when configuring the system refer to KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options on page 142 System Status 1050 53950 2550 wo ep Ts O E a 100 o0 Maw oo Amb oooooooo L Fig 161 Instrument status example Smartline Pump 1050 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 108 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method All of the instrument tabs provide communication status information at the bottom For instruments connected via RS 232 COM or serial port the serial port number is shown g Seral Fort COMIT SN n a Fig 162 KNAUER serial port instrument status For instruments controlled via LAN the IP address and IP port is shown O LAN 172 16 6 101 10001 SN AAAOSS600007 Fig 163 KNAUER LAN instrument status SN XXXXx This field displays the serial number of the instrument entered in the configuration window It should be the same as in the list in Fig 166 where the serial numbers are read out from the instrument The serial numbers serve as instrument identifiers an er
170. ite the existing settings To avoid configuration problems it is strongly recom mended to read out the pump configuration using the button If the communication is lost the pumps will stop after 30 seconds KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 23 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Note All pumps must be set internally onto the used communication interface If the Pump S 1050 is controlled by RS 232 in the pump s own setup the NTERFACE must be set to RS 232 and the BAUD RATE to 175200 AAADI3E00007 Config Service Add lnfo Cancel Help Fig 23 Pump S 1050 P 1 configuration window e m F Address Obtained using S N wal o Addilnfo Cancel Help Fig 24 Pump 10P 20P P 2 1S P 4 1S configuration window Fig 25 Pump P 2 1L configuration window KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Pump Con figuration 24 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Pump P6 1L Configuration Mame Po Gradient Mode isocratic Serial Number Use Constant Pressure Mode Interface J LAN HJ Head 10 ml A Obtained using 5 N Pressure Units MPa ka IF Fort 10001 Material nja Max Head Flow 10 0 ml min V Use S N to identify the instrument Max Head Pressure 70 0 MPa Mixing Chamber ul 100 hi Leak Sensor Sensitivity Low r Cancel Help Fig 26 Pump P 6 1L configuration window The configuration windows
171. ition include the drivers for KNAUER devices and additional features such as the KNAUER FRC option and the Runtime Settings as known from ChromGate The OpenLAB EE is shipped from KNAUER on several original OpenLAB EE disks plus one CD with the KNAUER extensions The XXXX number on the KNAUER CD for OpenLAB EE is the internal build number e g 5044 and may change if a new build is released A new build may include hotfixes and patches and or the support of additional devices The KNAUER drivers are valid for OpenLAB EZChrom Edition from version A 04 05 06 Please refer to the CDS_hw sw requirements pdf on the OpenLAB Shared Services Software DVD Disk 1 for hardware and software requirements e g for supported operating systems A Shared Services Server for Distributed or Networked Systems must run under Windows Server operating system All software especially virus detection software must be shut down during the installation For an installation of a workstation please refer to the CDS_WS InstallationGuide pdf The manuals CDS_DistribSystem Installation pdf or CDS_NetworkedWS Installation pdf will guide you through the installation of a Distributed or Networked System For the installation of the OpenLAB soft ware for Distributed or Networked Systems you must be logged onto the net work domain in which you will be working and the person performing the installation must have administrator rights KNAUER
172. ive state of the communication with the A D converter is represented by the green ii symbol Click the button to read out the connected A D converter The serial number device name and firmware version will be shown Of corse there is no option to check if the KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 128 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method device attached to the A D converter e g a detector is switched on or is working properly Device Information Serial Mo Device Software wersion 103021 IF2 IFU2 1 1 05 Fig 186 Device information for connected Interface Box Instrument Status Virtual Detector E Instrument Status System Status 51050 Ba Virtual Detector Run Status Signa 10 0 Apply Signal g Virtual Detector External Trigger OM Fig 187 Instrument Status Virtual detector Monitor RUN STATUS The status HOLD is displayed when no program is running other wise the Run Status displays a run time in minutes elapsed from the start of the run Direct Con SIGNAL The actual signal is indicated in this field The units correspond to the trol setting in the configuration of the user defined or virtual detector SIGNAL APPLY You can set the detector to a desired signal value for the time being EXTERNAL TRIGGER ON Clicking this button will trigger the signal to your system when in the position waiting for trigger for starting a run Instrument Stat
173. l The ON status is represented by an active red Light Emission Diode LED symbol the OFF status is represented by an inactive LED symbol 3 SET TEMPERATURE CONTROL T 1 CT 2 1 Press the OFF button to switch the tem perature control off It can be switched on again by setting the desired tem perature and clicking on the SET button TEMPERATURE Direct Control The oven temperature can be set The entered value will be transferred to the oven by clicking on the SET button POST COLUMN TEMP T 1 only The temperature of the post column thermostat can be set in the range of 15 to 35 C LEFT RIGHT VALVES POSITION T 1 only If the T 1 is equipped with valves the valves can be switched The available positions depend on the valve type EVENTS Direct Control T 1 only Click on the button to set up the digital outputs Refer to the section Configuring Events page 67 for details Click the Do APPLY button to accept the settings GLP COLUMNS The GLP section of the T 1 status window allows for reading out the GLP data of the T 1 REFRESH GLP Click on the REFRESH GLP button to read out the GLP informa tion of the device You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the GLP data The following GLP information will be shown KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 141 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Note The GLP information will not saved Instrument installation date Last serv
174. l Number Slv Peak Recycling Interhace rs 232 COM Port COMI Baud Aate 19200 Rack Type 12 13 mm tubes Humber of Viale 144 Vial Volume ml 10 Add Info Cancel Help Fig 222 Fraction collector Foxy R1 configuration window FC NAME Enter a descriptive name for the collector This name will appear on the fraction collector tab when the instrument setup or status windows are dis played Use a name which is unique within the instrument SERIAL NUMBER Type in the serial number of the collector you are using INTERFACE S 3050 Foxy R1 R2 only Select the Interface you wish to use for communication with the device Please refer to the collector s manual how to select and setup the interface in the collector s own menu RS 232 Select the number for the RS 232 communication port COM PorT on your PC to which the collector is connected LAN S 3050 To let the software search for your already connected and switched on device click on the button to start the search for all connected LAN devices of the currently configured type The option USE S N TO IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT must be enabled Select the desired device from the shown list The software will read out the information such as serial number and will fill it auto matically into the configuration screen To search for an instrument the device must be connected switched on and must have a valid IP address Optionally
175. l be made in the Instrument Activity Log E Instrument Activity Log Logged 09 09 2010 16 20 06 PC PM LAB TEST AS 3950 Stacked injection trigger marker is detected in 6 02 min after start 09 09 2010 16 19 50 PC PM LAB TEST AS 3950 Stacked injection 5 pl from vial 1C1 will be done in 5 75 min after start 09 09 2010 16 17 06 PC PM LAB TEST AS 3950 Stacked injection trigger marker is detected in 3 02 min after start 09 09 2010 16 16 50 PC PM LAB TEST AS 3950 Stacked injection 5 pl from vial 1B1 will be done in 2 75 min after start 09 09 2010 16 13 41 PC PM LAB TEST Run Queue Start Single Run C EZChrom Elite Enterprise Projects Defautt Datalstacked Injection with AS 4_2 003 dat 09 09 2010 16 13 40 PC PM LAB TEST Run Queue Add Single Run C EZChrom Elite Enterprise Projects DefaultiData Stacked Injection with AS 4_2003 dat w Fig 147 Autosampler 3950 Stacked injections instrument activity log entry Instrument Setup Manager I O S 5050 M 1 IF 2 IFU 2 1 E Instrument Setup ja Manager 5050 g IF 2AIFU 2 1 m M eF Trigger C Step Mode Fig 148 Instrument Setup Manager S 5050 M 1 IF2 IFU 2 1 PUMP PROGRAM Use this spreadsheet to enter your time program For details on the spreadsheet operations refer to the section Creating a Time Gradient Pro gram as described in the chapter PUMP PROGRAM Enter the maximum output voltage in the voltage column AO mV e g for maximum delivery of a pump and the per
176. l looptfill Autosampler 94 98 PDA 1 Instrument Setup 77 81 Plate process order Autosampler 3950 49 Port Settings Detector 35 Post Column Cooling Thermostat 56 Post Column Temp Column Thermostat 110 Prep mode Autosampler 3950 48 Preparative Option 153 Pressure Sensor Pump 27 Pressure Units Pump 26 Pretreatment Assistant 93 Switching Valve 107 Pump Add Info 28 At the end of run 64 Components 27 Config Service 27 Configuration 22 Control Pressure Limits 63 Cycle Time 62 Head 26 LAN 25 Leak Sensor Sensitivity 27 Max Pressure Mode 63 Maximum Pressure 63 Minimum Pressure 63 Pressure Sensor 27 Pressure Units 26 Read 27 Serial Number 26 Solvent 63 Solvent Type 64 Write 27 Pump 100 Gradient Mode 24 Instrument Setup 61 Interface 24 Name 24 Pump 1050 Gradient Mode 24 Instrument Setup 61 Interface 24 Name 24 RS 232 25 Pump 10P 20P Type 24 Pump Program IFU 105 Manager 105 R Range Interface Box 20 M 1 20 Manager 5050 20 Range from to DAD Detector 80 Read Pump 27 Reagent Vial Autosampler 3950 49 Recorder Range KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 204 Index Fluorescence Detector 86 Ref DAD Detector 82 Reference Correction DAD Detector 82 Register CDS permissions 11 Resulting Formula Virtual detector 90 RF 20A Setup 85 RF 20A Configuration 36 RF 20A Axs Baud Rate 36 Data Bits 36 Parity 36 Stop Bits 36 RF 20Axs Configuration 36 RI Detector Aut
177. l not be found and must be added manually Now configure or review each module detector pump autosampler etc sep arately If you try to exit the configuration dialog box with OK and one or more instruments are still not configured an appropriate message will appear Man ually added modules must be configured open module for configuration and click OK to finish the configuration ChromGate Client Server Fig 21 Example of a message to complete a configuration OPTIONS The OPTIONS button is used to initiate any optional analysis software for this instrument A list of available analysis options will be presented Configuration Options General LISEC OPDA C Baseline Check C Easy Sequence Fig 22 Analysis options window Click the box es to select the optional software you want to enable for this instrument SST BASELINE CHECK and EASY SEQUENCE are included Additional license options like SEC or PDA are required with costs Configuration KNAUER Pumps For each pump in the Configured Modules window double click the icon and complete the configuration dialog box Pumps with several interfaces LAN RS 232 must be set to the desired interface in their own setup menu Please refer to the pump s manual chapter Setup menu or Operation for more infor mation Note For the AZURA pumps P 2 1L and P 6 1L the configuration settings will be transferred into the pump and will overwr
178. l pass the flow cell The resulting scan will be shown in the signal window ABS SPECTRUM After clicking the ABs SPECTRUM button the device will run a scan of the absorption spectrum The resulting scan will be shown in the signal win dow HOLM SPECTRUM After clicking the HOLM SPECTRUM button the device will run a scan with the holmium filter The holmium filter will be automatically pulled into the light beam The resulting scan will be shown in the signal window SAVE SPECTRUM The spectrum currently be shown in the signal window can be stored as a spc spectrum file SIGNAL If a spectrum was acquired it will be shown in the Signal window The axis will be adjusted automatically KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 119 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Instrument Status Diode Array Detectors DAD 6 1L PDA 1 S 2600 S 2850 System Status S DADE IL System Status P 1_A P1_B as4 T1 PDA Fig 177 Instrument Status DAD PDA 1 Detector RUN STATUS The status HOLD will be displayed when no program is running Instrument otherwise the Run Status displays a run time in minutes elapsed from the start Status of the run LAMP TEMPERATURE Displays the illumination unit temperature CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 The actual signal in the units which have been chosen in the detector configuration dialog at the actual wavelength in nm is displayed for each active channel DIRECT
179. lid for all instruments of the Enterprise it is not limited on the currently used instrument or computer That means that the run time will be checked for all instruments and therefore in all methods that are stored on the mentioned Enter prise machine SYSTEM WAKE UP AND ALL LAMPS ON If the option SYSTEM WAKE UP AND ALL LAMPS ON S enabled and a date and time is selected all devices in Standby and the lamps of all connected detectors will be switched on at the selected time The time can be set by directly editing the time and date line If you click on the arrow key E you can select a date from a monthly overview refer to the picture below If enabled this option is valid for the currently used computer Note The Standby only works for AZURA and PLATINblue devices and the newer Smartline devices pump 1050 and detectors 2550 and 2520 Older Smartline devices such as detector 2600 cannot be woken up from Standby by a software command also the lamp of the detec tor cannot be switched on if the detector is in Standby Advanced Method Settings x Check run time when saving method E Enabled Cancel f System wake up and all lamps on Power all devices up at 25 04 13 13 58 44 Jy 4 April 2013 Trace name Si Mo Di Mi Do Fr Sa So W Use initial Lint 55 36 97 28 29 39 31 If this option is check 1 2 3 4 3 6 i initial wL Otherwise 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 conesponding chan 15 16 17 18 19 2 71 22
180. low for the pump or HPG system can be selected The allowed flow depends on the pump head For a 10 ml pump head the flow rate range is 0 00 9 99 ml min KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 93 Creating an Instrument Control Method for a 50 ml pump head 0 0 50 0 ml min Please note that for a HPG both pumps must have the same pump head If the detector is selected the column header shows WL nm Following the specifications of the UVD 2 1S the allowed wavelength range is 190 500 nm If a valve is selected the column header shows Pos A drop down menu will be accessible to select the desired valve position If the ASM 2 1L is selected as a device the column header shows EVENTs The field shows now the selected events _ will be shown for events for which no option is selected In practice this means that the current status will not be changed The setup will open by clicking the small arrow key The choices for the events are Off 0 On 1 and Pulse P 4TH COLUMN The 4 column is only to show A if as a device a pump of a HPG is selected This allows for selecting the A part of a gradient while B is calculated automatically by the software 100 A If no pump is selected the header shows PRETREATMENT This option enables several pretreatment operations of pumps and valves before injection and starting the data acquisition For setting up refer to the PRETREATMENT section on page 64
181. lowmeter only Select the desired capacity mode from the drop down menu The choices are VOLUME FLow and Mass FLow The Y AXIS UNIT will change according to the selected capacity mode CAPACITY LimiT Bronkhorst Flowmeter only Set the capacity limit depending of your flowmeter model and the selected CAPACITY MODE and Y Axis UNITS Y AXIS UNITS Bronkhorst Flowmeter only The available Y Axis UNITS depend from the selected capacity mode KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 58 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument configuration icon list Configuration SIKA Thermometer Hanne MH 3710 Serial Humber Serial Port Address Cancel Help Fig 79 SIKA thermometer configuration window NAME Enter a descriptive name for the thermometer This name will appear on the thermometer tab when the instrument setup or status windows are dis played Use a name which is unique within the instrument SERIAL NUMBER Type in the serial number of the thermometer you are using SERIAL PorT Select the number for the communication port on the PC to which the thermometer is connected Please note that only COM 1 8 is supported ADDRESS Select the address used by the device If the address selected in the device and the address selected in OpenLAB do not match no communication can be established When complete click OK to exit the
182. lows to enter a temperature between 4 C and 15 C TIMED EVENTS These types of events or methods enable you to control other devices via the two auxiliaries contact closures or to activate a new oven set point Each event can be programmed on a time basis which starts at the moment of injection Click on the TIMED EVENTS button to set up the time based methods in the fol lowing dialog box Time Based Methods Programmed methods Method type No Method At time New Time OF h 1 min 30 sec 1 Aus ON 0 00 01 2 Aus OFF 0 07 00 Delete Commit a Cancel Fig 132 Autosampler KNAUER Optimas timed events New Click the New button to add additional lines to the programmed meth ods Clicking the New button activates the method type drop down menu METHOD TYPE Select one of the available AUX 1 and AUX 2 Both auxiliary AUX 1 and AUX 2 can be set to Switch ON contact closure four times and four KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 96 Creating an Instrument Control Method times to Switch OFF at a programmed TIME It is not possible to program the same auxiliary to ON and OFF at the same time The maximum programmable time for the time based methods is 9 h 59 min 59 sec COMMIT Click the ComMmIT button to actualize your selection DELETE Click the DELETE button to remove the selected line from the pro grammed methods The STOP EVENTS AT TIME allows setting the end time of the
183. lve pump 129 Instrument Status ASM 2 1L HPG 130 ASM 2 1 L status tab OV s 2 2 ves ooh dwio ghee Sek ede es os 131 ASM2 1L status tab Valve s 2 2 ee ee 132 ASM2 1L status tab System with UV Diagnostics 132 GLP Information ASM 2 1L with valve valve pump 133 Instrument Status Autosampler KNAUER Optimas 134 Instrument Status Autosampler 3950 2 000 135 Instrument Status Manager M 1 5050 IF 2 IFU 2 1 136 Instrument Status Switching Valves 02 2 ee eee 137 Instrument Status Column Thermostat CT 2 1 139 Instrument Status Column Thermostat T 1 139 Instrument Status Column Thermostat Jetstream 139 Instrument Status Bronkhorst Flowmeter 0004 142 Instrument Status SIKA Thermometer 0020008 143 KNAUER Instrument Runtime Settings 142 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Option Advanced Runtime Set UNGS riges parade ious eet oe aes wae eee eb ae es tle KES 143 Error message Run time check failed 0008 143 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 213
184. lve for recycling Slv Peak Recycling Recycling Oe Volumetric delay Fixed time min Capillary Length em 0 00 Capillary Volume cm3 0 000 Add Info Cancel Fig 224 Solvent Peak Recycling Foxy R1 Siv Peak Recycling Recycling Volumetric delay a Fined time mir Capillary Length em C Use own ports for recycling Capillary Volume cm3 0 000 Add Info Cancel Fig 225 Solvent Peak Recycling S 3050 Slv Peak USE RECYCLING VALVE To define a separate recycling valve check the option USE Recycling RECYCLING VALVE and click on the button For the separate recycling valve a COM port or the IP address must be defined The settings for the volumetric delay will be displayed without editing access The settings are valid for the recycling valve as well for the fractionation valve Therefore the capillary KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 157 OpenLAB Preparative Option between the recycling valve and the fraction collector should be as short as possible Recycling Valve Configuration Settings Serial number Valve type B pozitiong Interface LAN Obtained using 5M IP Fort 10001 V Use S N to identify the instrument Fig 226 Recycling valve setup USE OWN PORTS FOR RECYCLING Only for the KNAURR fraction collector S 3050 and the MultiValve fraction collectors the option USE OWN PORTS FOR RECYCLING will be displayed If you wan
185. ly difference is that negative times must be entered because they are relative to the zero injection time Note If a pretreatment is to be defined for more than one instrument pump and or valve drive in a method it is required to set for all of them the same earliest time All pretreatment procedures will start simultaneously KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 108 Creating an Instrument Control Method Note If a pump should exactly switch off after 5 minutes of pretreatment include a line with 0 ml min flow into the pretreatment s pump program Otherwise the pump may run for a longer time as it need some seconds to load the new flow rate from the method s normal pump program An example for both A pump should run for exactly 5 minutes before the injection and a valve should switch 2 minutes before injection from position 2 to position 5 means 3 minutes after the pump s pretreatment is started Here are the setup tables create a time table for the valve which starts with 5 minutes 5 04 min 1 ml min 5 04 min pos 2 0 04 min 1 ml min 2 00 min pos 5 0 02 min 0 ml min 0 00 min pos 5 Instrument Setup Column Thermostat T 1 T 1 Basic JetStream CT 2 1 The oven program profile is automatically adapted to the spreadsheet inputs The Smartline column thermostat is supported as JetStream For details on the spreadsheet operations refer to the section Creating a Time Gradient Program as
186. m Gain 10 Attenuation 1 Signal 0 00130 LastError 0 Communication active For Help press F1 Fig 219 Instrument status tab example Jasco FP 920 Depending on the device the most important parameters will be monitored and displayed in the status area Direct Control is not supported for Generic Drivers KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 152 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options Generic Drivers only support basic functionality Please ask KNAUER for avail able new Generic Drivers or for the requirements for the development of a new Generic Driver please contact KNAUER info knauer net KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 153 OpenLAB Preparative Option OpenLAB Preparative Option To use the OpenLAB Preparative Option it has to be installed separately as described in KNAUER FRC control option on page 12 Then the implemented fraction collectors will appear in the device list for creating instruments KNAUER HPLC System Available modules Configured modules FC Buechi FC Smartline 3050 FC Vario 2000 FC Vario 4000 Multivalve FC P Valco Multivalve FC P Virtual FC me FC Foxy A FC Foxy A FC Buechi C B60 jaa Manager IF 10 B Bronkhorst Flowmeter EJ Injection Module 4 mW Options Auto Configuration a Cancel Help Fig 220 Fraction collector selection window Configuration Fraction Collector In any system you can include only one frac
187. m Status 1050 3950 52560 AS Status Ready Tray Temperature C 4 Current Vial Tray Temperature C Start Needle Wash Move Tray 2 LAN 172 16 56 103 SN OO0000000000 gt gt aa Fig 195 Instrument Status Autosampler 3950 Monitor AS STATUs The status Ready is displayed when the autosampler is waiting to perform an injection If an injection program is running the actual program step will be indicated After a completed injection the status is described as Analysis timer running during the chromatographic run CURRENT VIAL The actual position of the injection needle is shown TRAY TEMPERATURE If the tray cooling option has been installed and configured the actual tray temperature will be shown Direct Con DIRECT CONTROL The direct control features are not accessible during an injec trol tion TRAY TEMPERATURE If the cooling option is installed and configured the tray tem perature can be set The entered value will be transferred to the sampler by clicking the APPLY button ON OFF The OFF button can be used for disabling the cooling control To switch it on again set the required temperature and press the APPLY button RESET TRANSPORT VIALS only with 84 3 vials tray If the tray type 84 3 vials is configured the button RESET TRANSPORT VIALS allows for reset the transport liquid level of all transport vials vials 85 86 87 to the default value of 8000 ul If you Click on this button
188. m range BW The bandwidth is a measure of the range over which the calculations and measurements are used to calculate the intensity for a particular wavelength For example with a 10 nm bandwidth the intensity for 250 nm would be cal culated from 245 nm to 255 nm A wider bandwidth results in an increased signal to noise ratio because the multiple measurements cause the random noise to be canceled out That is if the noise is truly random more measurements will decrease the noise because for each positive noise excursion there is a good likelihood that it will be can celed by a negative excursion But since the signal is not random it will remain the same over multiple measurements A high bandwidth value will decrease the noise level but also decrease the pos sible resolution which can be measured The default value is 8 nm but if your peaks have substantially wider UV spectra you can increase the bandwidth value in OpenLAB to obtain a lower noise level Each discrete channel can use its own wavelength program and can be mea sured with its own bandwidth so you can always obtain the lowest noise con ditions while still having a low enough bandwidth to not degrade the resolution measured This means that the diode array detectors can always be optimized for maxi mum performance The scan parameters can be set to the values which are optimal for doing the scans and yet the discrete channels can be measured independently at their op
189. m will not start the next run and an appropriate error message will be displayed RESTART FROM FIRST VIAL OF CURRENT RUN for Stacked Injections If stacked injec tions are used check this box if you wish the collector to start the fraction col lection for every stacked injection with the same vial as in the previous runs This is an option if you inject the same sample several times and want to col KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fraction Collector Instrument Setup 163 OpenLAB Preparative Option lect the fractions of the same substances from every run in the same fraction vials ADJUST FRC TABLE AFTER STACKED INJECTION for Stacked Injections This option allows you to copy the already executed part of the fraction table for the next injection if a stacked injection is performed In this case you will have the same collection conditions for every injection without any manual intervention This option is useful if you need to program different collection parameters for your fractions which otherwise would have to be programmed separately for every Injection The INITIAL ADJUST TIME you enter here is the delay time for adjusting the fraction table after the first stacked injection For all other stacked injections the stacked injection table of the injection device autosampler or injection module will be used This is required due to that normally the required delay is different for the first stacked inje
190. main if one exists for access Click REGISTER AIC to execute the settings 5 A message wi confirm with ndow will open that reports the successful registration please OK z amp Agilent OpenLAB CDS EZChrom Edition Registration OpenLAB Shared Services Credentials AIC Instrument Service Account Global PC TD OL 13 Hostname or IP PC TD OL 13 Port 9753 Register AIC net pipe localhost Agilent OpenLAB E Description Agilent Instrument Controller PC TD OL 13 Drivers Registered Register Drivers V Add Windows Firewall Exceptions al Registration Results a Register AIC SUCCESS KNAUER HPLC system Create RecoveryData folder SUCCESS Multiple Instrument Support SUCCESS Windows Firewall Exceptions SUCCESS Fig 5 AIC tab with registration for a standalone workstation and message win dow with Registration Results 6 Select the tab GLOBAL 7 Enable the option REGISTER CDS PERMISSIONS If you have installed a Net worked workstation or AIC in a Distributed System you must enter the ENTERPRISE PATH in the appropriate field If you have already created an administrator in OpenLAB Control Panel you must enter user name and password and select the domain if one exists for access Click on REGISTER GLOBAL SETTINGS to execute the settings 8 A message window will open that reports the successful registration please confirm with OK
191. me constant Sec Sampling rate Hz Suitable for minimum peak width at base of 0 333 Min Run time Acquisition delay V Autozero at start NoAction atthe end of run _ Autozero at WL change Wavelength nm Wavelength nm Fig 101 Instrument Setup detector 10D UVD 2 1S UVD 2 1L S 2520 AUTOZERO AT START Check the Autozero field if you wish the signal to be zeroed at the moment a measurement is started to define the current signal as the baseline AUTOZERO AT WL CHANGE Check this field if you wish the signal to be zeroed upon a wavelength change during a run ACTION AT THE END OF RUN The options are No ACTION and LAmpP OFF The detec tors UVD 2 1L and S 2520 allow also to send the device into Standby No ACTION AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option no action will take place after the run time has elapsed LAMP OFF AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option the lamp will switch off after the run time has elapsed STANDBY AT THE END OF RUN UVD 2 1L S 2520 only Upon selecting this option the detector will switch into standby after the run time has elapsed Note If the lamp is switched off by the method and the detector is then switched off upon switching the detector on again the lamp will remain off The lamp must be switched on manually in the detec tor s own setup or via the Direct Control option in the Instrument Status window of the software Note For the detector S 2520 t
192. n No ACTION AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option no action will take place after the run time has elapsed LAMP OFF AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option the lamp will switch off after the run time has elapsed STANDBY AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option the detector will switch into standby after the run time has elapsed Note You should switch the lamp on from the direct control window before you start the next working session After power up allow 30 minutes for the lamp to stabilize before running samples that may require sensitive measurements ADVANCED Pressing the ADVANCED button to open the advanced setup Advanced Settings Acquisition Acquisition delay Scale i10OV 10 AU Autozero at start El Autozero at WL change Fig 113 Reference correction window DAD 6 1L An output To get the measurement signal on the analog output you must enable this option The data rate corresponds with the acquisition data rate but the maximum data rate is 10 Hz SCALE The selected value represents the full scale Values are selectable from 0 001 AU up to 10 AU The maximum output is 5 V AUTOZERO AT WL CHANGE Check this field if you wish the signal to be zeroed upon a wavelength change during a run At the run start always an Autozero is performed KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Detector Instrument Setup Action at the end of run 81 Creating an Instrume
193. n 0 90 only available through KNAUER that allows for serial control other firmware versions are not compatible Instrument Setup zag E RF 104xl E RF 204 p Trigger V Acquisition channel on Wavelength program Time constant 0 1 v Sec Sampling rate 0 5 v Hz 0 00 254 500 MED x1 x1 7 F Emission not corrected Suitable for minimum peak width at base of 0 666 Min 10 00 254 500 MED x1 x1 E E Emission not corrected Run time 10 Min Acquisition delay 0 Min Lamp OFF at the end of run Time 8 1537 Minutes Amplitude 254 Wavelength nm Wavelength nm amp amp 3 2 Fig 122 Instrument Setup Fluorescence Detector RF 20A Axs LAMP OFF AT THE END OF RUN Upon selecting this option the lamp s will switch off after the run time has elapsed This option may be used for the shutdown methods WAVELENGTH PROGRAM All additional settings are integrated as additional col umns into the spreadsheet for the detector time program The creation of the detector time program is similar in principal to that described above in the chapter CREATING PUMP PROGRAM TIME EXCITATION and EMISSION The TIME EXCITATION wavelength and EMISSION wavelength values must be entered manually whereas the options AUTOZERO EVENT OUT and EVENT MARK can be checked separately for each time line EVENT OuT short circuits the event out terminal for approximately 1 second EVENT MARK adds an event m
194. n be monitored from the 3D data stream Select the check box to activate the associated chan nel SAMPLE The sample wavelength s is are defined in the Wavelength Program section of the Instrument Setup window Bw The bandwidths for the sample channels are also defined in the Wave length Program section of the Instrument Setup window REF Reference is the wavelength at which a reference absorbance is measured as a function of time The reference wavelength compensates for fluctuations caused by changes in baseline absorbance for example due to changes in sol vent composition during gradient elution The selected wavelength must be higher than the sample wavelength and be inside of the scan range for this detector Bw Enter the bandwidth of the reference wavelength Limits are 1 to 32 nm in 1 nm steps When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument setup KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 83 Creating an Instrument Control Method Detector SCAN nm Instrument Setup Start 200 End 400 Bandwidth 1 Signal mode Absorption Acquire 3D data Fig 117 DAD setup scan range This section allows you to specify the scan spectral interval in nm The given range limits are read out from the used instrument Therefore they may differ from the shown values START Enter the start wavelength for the scan in nm END Enter the end wavelength for the scan in nm BANDWIDTH
195. n in the FRC table setup will open The values are escaped from the current chromatogram You can change it if necessary If you click OK the settings will be executed Please note that inserting lines into the FRC table during a run will interrupt the cur rently valid settings from the table COLLECT TO The operation fraction collection can be initiated here The destina tion vial is either defined as NEXT or in case of COLLECT TO by its number In case of selected operation COLLECT SLICES To NEXT is fixed and you can enter a slice volume in ML The collection starts by clicking on the Go button RUN TIME SETTINGS All operations started in the Direct Control for SINGLE EVENT mode are performed unconditioned as timed events For consecutive condi tioned runs the values for level slope and the expected interval will be stored according the settings However in any case it is recommended to check the automatically stored fractionation program before using it CLEAR RACK If clicking the Clear Rack button all fraction information will be deleted from the rack file This option corresponds to the Collector Reset oper ation in the FRC setup However due to that really all information will be deleted be sure that you don t need it before pressing the button RACK View The displayed rack corresponds to the configured one All already used vials will appear green highlighted Moving the cursor across the rack will change the upper de
196. n sum KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Stacked Injections 185 OpenLAB Preparative Option TIME BETWEEN INJECTIONS MIN Enter the time between the injections The value must be higher than the time calculated for the injection duration The selected time depends on the retention time of the eluated peaks If you need help for the design of the Stacked injection please contact KNAUER via info knauer net Click the APPLY button to apply the settings into the Stacked injections table Stacked Injection Table Use Stacked Injection Simulate Stacked Injection not defined Fig 267 Injection Module Stacked injection table If you make a right mouse click on the table you can select FiLL DOWN to fill the table with the same settings as in the selected line SHIFT LINES Allows changing the time for the currently selected line A window will open to enter the desired time shift As an example a time shift of 2 00 min for a line at 10 00 min will change the time to 12 00 min A negative time shifts to an earlier time For example to shift the time of a line at 10 00 min to 9 00 min enter 1 00 min The time of all following lines will be changed ade quately That means if for a line the time will be shifted by 2 minutes the time of all lines below will also be shifted by 2 minutes INSERT LINE to add a new line DELETE LINE to delete the selected line DELETE LINES to delete all selected lines FIL
197. nal DAD diode array detectors with the capability to simultaneously collect data over the entire ultraviolet UV and visible VIS spectra The detector MWD 2 1L has the same technical base as the DAD 2 1L but cannot acquire 3D data Therefore the setup of the detector MWD 2 1L is described in this chapter The detectors support the general detector settings described above rrr E A Instrument Setup E DADE AL 2x Aux Traces Ro Trigger V Store 3D data Range from 200 to 400 Bandwidth 1 Run time Sampling rate Lamps on required for acquisition V D2 lamp Time constant Suitable for minimum peak width at base of o Action v atthe end of run Fig 108 Instrument Setup detector DAD 6 1L with PDA option KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 78 Creating an Instrument Control Method CHANNELS INITIAL WAVELENGTHS Fig 109 Detector DAD 6 1L wavelength program table Use CHN Check the box es to turn on the acquisition for the selected chan nel s If the box is not selected no data will be acquired and no time program will be executed for this channel For channels witch are not activated in the instrument configuration this box is inaccessible WL Select the wavelength for the channel The wavelength must be in the defined spectru
198. nd run KNAUER devices in OpenLAB EE This manual is intended to be a supplement to the general OpenLAB Chroma tography Data System documentation and contains information specific to the use of the optional KNAUER instrument control option The OpenLAB Control Panel The OpenLAB Control Panel allows for administrating the software creating new Projects Users and Instruments configuration of Instruments showing the System Activity Log attaching Printers installing Licenses Fig 14 OpenLAB EE Control Panel Creating a Project Without a project an instrument cannot be opened It is recommended to create the project first then the instrument The Projects pane is used to add edit or remove projects in the Control Panel A project is a set of directories to store related methods data sequences KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 18 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems results and templates Project Groups can be used to arrange projects to match your organization Overview of Instrument Control The instrument control option for the KNAUER HPLC System enables you to enter instrument control parameters that become part of the method The parameters are then executed in real time when samples are acquired using the data system The software allows you to set and control parameters as pres sures flows and gradients for pumps data rates wavelengths and scans for detectors injection
199. ndow For details on other aspects of method development calibration integration and sequence operations see the OpenLAB Data System User Manual or Online help System Status Open the Instrument Status window using the menu CONTROL INSTRUMENT STA TUS from the MAIN MENU or CONTROL INSTRUMENT STATUS from the NAVIGATION PANEL The Instrument Status window contains the status tabs for all configured devices and as shown in the figure below the system status tab which provides an overview of the whole system System Status 51050 53950 2660 Fig 159 Instrument Status system status tab method not running KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 107 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method System Status 4 P11 lt i P2 amp asa B 1 1 4 Poa Fig 160 Instrument Status system status tab method running For some devices the software reads out the data only during a running method Therefore if no method is running some data are not available n a or might not be the actual data but rather data from a previous run The run ning method is visualized by the bright bold lines between the displayed instruments For each pump with pressure sensor identified by its name the actual flow and pressure are displayed If a gradient system is configured the solvent composi tion is also shown For each detector channel the output value and as far as available the wave length
200. ndow has four tabs one for general settings and one for each of the three device positions LEFT DEVICE MIDDLE DEVICE and RIGHT DEVICE While the GENERAL tab allows for settings for the whole assistant the device tabs give the option to configure the included devices ASSISTANT NAME The name of the Assistant ASM 2 1L appears automatically You can enter any other descriptive name This name will appear on the Assis tant tab when the instrument setup or instrument status windows are dis played Note Use a name which is unique within the instrument configuration KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 43 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems SERIAL NUMBER If you have read out the device via LAN the serial number is added automatically Otherwise type in the serial number of the instrument INTERFACE The Assistant ASM 2 1L supports LAN connection only one LAN port for all 3 devices is required Interace LAN ka laal Obtained using 5 N IF Fort 10001 Use S N to identify the instrument Fig 57 LAN interface As all other LAN controlled devices the Assistant ASM 2 1L can be added and configured automatically using the AUTO CONFIGURATION button on the INSTRU MENT SELECTION WINDOW All included devices will be recognized and configured In addition to this you can let the software search for your already connected and switched on ASM 2 1L from the devices configuration window For this the option Use S
201. nected to the RFID terminal strip Instrument Status Flowmeter E Instrument Status System Status agli P 1 AS 1 hiv 2 Bronkhorst Flowmeter Monitor GLP Refresh Run status Minimum Capacity Range 16 6 mol ron Maximum Capacity Range 497 1 ml min Flow ml min Current Capacity Range 30 0 mln Current Counter alue 0 0 ral Density kg m3 CD SerialPort COM1 SN B1020 Fig 201 Instrument Status Bronkhorst Flowmeter RUN STATUS The status HOLD is displayed when no program is running other wise the Run Status displays a run time in minutes elapsed from the start of the run Flow The actual flow is shown in the units defined in the instrument setup REFRESH A click on the REFRESH button will read out the GLP information The GLP data cannot be stored in the method KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 143 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Instrument Status SIKA Thermometer EP System Status a Pa asa A Tal amp ww MH 3710 Fig 202 Instrument Status SIKA Thermometer RuN STATUS The status HOLD is displayed when no program is running other wise the Run Status displays a run time in minutes elapsed from the start of the run TEMPERATURE The actual temperature is shown in the units defined in the instru ment setup KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 142 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options KNAUER Instrume
202. ng the pump at constant pressure with vari able flow rate also in a gradient system INTERFACE Select from the drop down list the serial port or network number for the communication port on your PC where the instrument is connected KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Interface 25 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems The pumps P 1 S 1050 100 10P 20P P 2 1S P 4 1S allow for communica tion via RS 232 or LAN Select the interface you want to use for communication with the device The same interface must be set in the pump s own menu For pumps P 2 1L and P 6 1L only communication via LAN is supported RS 232 Select the number for the RS 232 communication port COM PorT on your PC to which the pump is connected Note If the pump S 1050 is controlled by RS 232 in the pump s own setup the NTERFACE must be set to RS232 115200 Please refer to the pump s manual chapter SETUP MENU for more information COM Port coMt Baud Aate 115200 Fig 28 Available interfaces pumps S 1050 S 100 10P 20P P 1 P 2 15 P 4 15 LAN All LAN controlled devices can be added and configured automatically using the Auto Configuration button on the configuration main window In addition to this you can let the software search for your already connected and switched on device from the devices configuration window For this the option USE S N TO IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT must be enabled Click on the bu
203. njections Stacked Injections Cancel Number of Injections Injection Wolume ml Injection Flow ml min Injection Duration mir Time between Injections min Fig 272 Injection module Stacked injections table setup If you click the APPLY button the new table will be executed immediately the program will not check when the last injection was made If the DIRECT CONTROL DURING A RUN option SAVE CHANGES IN TIME TABLE is enabled all program lines for stacked injections which have not been executed yet dur ing the current run will be replaced by the Stacked Injections from the Direct Control whereas lines for stacked injections which have already been exe cuted during the current run remain untouched If the DIRECT CONTROL DURING A RUN option SAVE CHANGES IN TIME TABLE is not active the new table will be executed but not stored in the instrument setup How ever in this case the method does not include the correct injection program KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 189 Table of Figures Table of Figures Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
204. nm would be calculated from 245 nm to 255 nm A wider bandwidth results in an increased signal to noise ratio because the multiple measurements cause the random noise to be canceled out But it also decrease the possible resolution which can be measured MODE Select the signal mode for your measurements from the drop down list The choices are ABSORPTION and INTENSITY While absorption shows the spectrum in MAU the intensity is shown in ADC counts APPLY To send the selected shutter position to the DAD click on the APPLY but ton FILTER ON OFF S 2600 only You can click on this button depending on whether or not you are using an edge filter DARK SIGNAL Click the button to measure the dark current This operation is enabled only for devices equipped with a shutter The dark signal is the signal without light came from the noise of electronic components of the device The dark signal can be subtracted from the measurement signal to suppress the electronic noise RESET DARK The stored dark signal spectrum will be deleted SET REFERENCE Click the button to measure a spectrum of the light that will not pass the flow cell reference The resulting scan will be shown in the signal window SPECTRUM Click the button to measure an absorption or intensity spectrum depending on the signal mode selected for the measurement The measured spectrum will be shown in the spectrum view KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4
205. nt Control Method Instrument Setup Diode Array Detectors PDA 1 S 2600 S 2850 The detectors PDA 1 S 2600 and S 2850 are fully functional DAD diode array detector or PDA photo diode array detectors with the capability to simulta neously collect data over the entire ultraviolet UV and visible VIS spectra These detectors support the general detector settings described above Instrument Setup o Jka xe 3 PDA 1 ie Trigger Time constant Sec Start 200 End 400 Bandwidth 1 Sampling rate Signal mode Suitable for minimum peak width at base of 0 333 Min V Acquire 3D data Run time Acquisition delay Used channel 7 7 2 Bandwidth mm 8 _ An output Scale 10 V 10A4U Autozero at start Autozero at WL change at the end of run Advanced Wavelength nm Wavelength nm Fig 114 Instrument Setup detector PDA 1 An output You can activate the option to select the scaling of the analog out put signal This option is not compatible with higher data rates The following error message Is displayed when the window is closed Fig 115 Error message regarding too high sample rate if analog out is activated SCALE The selected value represents the full scale Values are selectable from 0 001 AU up to 10 AU AUTOZERO AT WL CHANGE Check this field if you wish the signal to be zeroed upon a wavelength change during a run At the run start always an Autozero is performed LA
206. nt Control Method Options Runtime Settings General Settings Some general method settings are exclusive to the KNAUER instrument con trol They are accessible by the METHOD menu Runtime Settings The Runtime Setting options are general settings The selection is valid for all OpenLAB methods until it is changed Open the Runtime Settings window using the menu METHOD RUNTIME SETTINGS from the main menu Runtime Settings F emergency during a run it detected then Cancel C Switch all lamps off Switch all ovens off Direct Control during a run Advanced Enabled Save changes in time table Hep Fig 203 KNAUER Instrument Runtime Settings IF EMERGENCY DURING A RUN IS DETECTED THEN In the case that an emergency situa tion is detected the software can be forced to STOP FLOW FOR ALL PUMPS and or to SWITCH ALL LAMPS OFF and or SWITCH ALL OVENS OFF by activating the respective check boxes If enabled this option is valid for the currently used computer DIRECT CONTROL DURING A RUN If this option is enabled all devices can be con trolled manually using the Direct Control section of the device s Instrument Status tab The Direct Control during a run option is a valuable tool for method development but can also lead to unintended changes to the method For this reason it is recommended that this option is not enabled especially for routine methods All changes during a run will be added
207. nt Recycling None Collect Slices Cancel Fig 242 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Unconditional Parameters ACTION The full action menu is only accessible if the Single Event mode is selected in the fraction table for the mentioned time If the Peak Recognition mode is selected the only choices are COLLECT TO and COLLECT SLICES The selec tion where accessible is independent of the set EVENT unconditional signal level The choices are WASTE The eluate will be wasted COLLECT To The eluate will be led to the set position PEAK RECYCLING The eluate will be led back to the column peak saving requires additional equipment SOLVENT RECYCLING The eluate will be collected in a recycling container because its purity is better than the set limits NONE Neither the recycling valve nor the fractionation valve will be switched The previous action is continued only a marker is set COLLECT SLICES The eluate will be collected in set volume fractions into the next free positions The minimum allowed volume is 0 1 ml the maximum allow volume is equal to the defined fraction vial volume It is recommended to set the minimum value for a slice not smaller than equal to 5 seconds therefore the mentioned 0 1 ml is suitable for a flow rate lt 2 ml min KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 EVENT SIGNAL LEVEL 168 OpenLAB Preparative Option For the UNCONDITIONAL event
208. nt Status Manager S 5050 M 1 IF 2 IFU 2 1 136 Instrument Status KNAUER Switching Valves 0 00200 137 Instrument Status Column Oven CT 2 1 Jetstream T 1 Basic and T 1 1 0 ee ee ees 139 Instrument Status Flowmeter 0 ee eee ee teens 142 Instrument Status SIKA Thermometer 020 eee eee eee ee 143 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options 142 General SCWINGS ai aoa Sw ak oa ee eas hee SSRs a wee a 142 RUNUME SEWINGS ae ase i et Scns ost a Se wah a oie A ale ae Be eh ew we 142 Download Tab Method amp ocicsicheideeeeeice seed darted eececaa 145 ValidationceOnINteGrauiONn s 6s22e0 ee155y hese es See eae eae ees 145 GENENE DINGS si oc06 ti bond bie ae ce Cesena be cea ie Renee 150 OpenLAB Preparative Option cece eee ee eee eee 153 Configuration Fraction Collector 0 0 eee eee ee ee eee 153 Configuration Virtual Fraction Collector 0 6 157 Configuration MultiValve Fraction Collector 158 Instrument Setup Fraction Collector 0 0 0 ce eee eee eee 161 Instrument Status Fraction Collector 0 0 0 0 eee ee ee eee 177 MultiValve Fraction Collector cee eee ee eee 179 FV ACTONANNOLALIONS x e en EE hic Sevaae Soares ocak ele Soe evAR eB Aone dod Secor 180 stacked INjGCUON ceres tere SS ees ode oe Gee Oe en ee Gwe 68s 181 Confi
209. ny method the fraction collector program must be connected to a rack configuration The rack configuration file contains informa tion about collected fractions in one or several runs Opening the fraction col KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 164 OpenLAB Preparative Option lector tab of the setup window for the first time no rack configuration path will be displayed E s 1050 69 s 3950 E JetStream Oven m9 s 2600 E S 3050FC 3 Aux Traces I Trigger 2600 Channel 1 iv Single Event Unconditional Fig 235 Instrument Setup Fraction collector You must either create a new rack file or load an already existing one CREATE OPEN Press the CREATE OPEN button to open a window similar to a data manager Here you can either select an existing file or type in a new file name which should be descriptive for the configured rack Due to that the rack file also includes the number of fractionation vials an already existing rack file must match with the fraction collector configuration of the currently opened instrument In both cases press the OPEN button The window will be closed KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 165 OpenLAB Preparative Option and the path Is displayed in setup window 236 ff Select the Rack configuration file Oe wb Enterprise Projects TestLocation FC v Search FC Organize v New folder MM Desktop z Name Date modified mi Downloa
210. o the baseline signal at the start of data acquisition you must connect an autoz ero signal cable to the Interface Box The autozero signal is connected to one of the digital output connectors on the rear panel of the Interface Box For IFU 2 1 connect one pole of the autozero cable to one of the connectors labeled RELAY NO or RELAY NC normal opened or normal closed depending on your detector and the other pole to the connector labeled RELAY digital ground If you use a Interface Box IF2 and Managers S 5050 M 1 connect one pole of the autozero cable to one of the outer connectors labeled RELAY right handed connector is normal open relay the left handed connector is a normal close relay depending on your detector and the other pole to the RELAY connector between digital ground SOUGCCECOEEES tt 3 l ATTENTION AT Fig 55 Wiring example Manager S 5050 IF2 and detector The example shows the connection lines between the Interface Box IF2 or Manager S 5050 and a detector If a KNAUER detector is connected via serial RS 232 or LAN port the autozero and the measurement signal are transferred via this connection The pictures shows only show the principle of connection Configuration Assistant ASM 2 1L The AZURA Assistant ASM 2 1L is a modular instrument that allows combina tion of up to 3 devices The following modules can be included Pumps P 2 1S P 4 1S KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V26
211. o the real volume of your fractionation vials The entered vial volume is valid for all vials of the fraction collector TUBING PARAMETERS These settings enable someone to consider the time delay for transporting the sample from the flow cell to the collector valve Here you can adapt it to the real conditions of your system Use the description for the settings on FIXED TIME CAPILLARY LENGTH or CAPILLARY VOLUME under Fraction Col lector Configuration page 155 SLV OR PEAK RECYCLING The solvent and peak recycling options can be used as described for the fraction collectors above Configuration MultiValve Fraction Collector MultiValve FC Configuration FC name Valeo MY FC Tubing Slv 7 Peak Recycling Number of valves 1 Vial volume ml 100 Number of vials 5 Interface R5 232 Configure valve Serial number COM Fort com Valve type B positions Baud Aate 4600 g Add Valve Info Cancel Help Fig 228 MultiValve Fraction Collector configuration window The configuration of the MultiValve FC with KNAUER of Vici Valco valves is identical You cannot mix up KNAUER and Vici Valco valves in a MultiValve FC Always the last port will be used as a waste port If you cascade valves for a higher number of fractions the last port of a valve must be connected with the next cascaded valve Valve 1 Valve 2 Fraction 1 5 Fraction 6 10 Fig 229 MultiValve
212. of the installed needle and tubing in ul The valid range is 0 999 ul The volume is noted on a label on the tube SYRINGE VOLUME Select the volume of installed syringe from the drop down list The choices are 250 ul 1000 ul and 2500 ul If the 2500 ul syringe is selected automatically the Prep mode check box is enabled TRAY COOLING PREP MODE Check the appropriate boxes if you want to control the tray cooling or enable the Prep mode The desired tray temperature can be entered later as part of the instrument setup In the Prep mode the values for SYRINGE VOLUME 2500 ul and LooP VoLUME 10000 ul and the 24 VIAL TRAY TYPE are fixed The tubing volume is set to 45 ul Please check the correct volume of the tube between the needle and the injection valve on the tube s label KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Tray config uration 52 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems TRAY Click the TRAY button to set up the autosampler tray Tray configuration C First destination viak 10 Fig 67 Tray configuration for the autosampler KNAUER Optimas TRAY TYPE Select the type of the installed tray The choices are 84 3 96 and 24 vials In Prep mode the tray type is fixed on 24 vials VIAL TYPE Select the type of the vials used The choices are 2 5 ml and STANDARD for the 24 vials tray only STANDARD FIRST DESTINATION VIAL Enable this option if you want to use destination vials Enter the first
213. off The lamp s must be switched on manually in the detector s own setup or via the Direct Control option in the Instrument Status window of the software Note You should switch on the lamp either manually or from the direct control window before you start the next working session After power up allow 30 minutes for the lamp to stabilize before running samples that may require sensitive measurements SCAN NM RANGE XXX YYY NM This section allows you to specify the scan spec tral interval in nm START Enter the start wavelength for the scan in nm END Enter the end wavelength for the scan in nm ACQUIRE 3D DATA You have access to this selection field only with the PDA option The displayed range depends on the detector type and the installed lamps It will only be updated if you open that window online ADVANCED The ADVANCED button becomes accessible if the ACQUIRE 3D DATA box is selected Start 200 End 500 Advanced 4 Acquire 3D data Fig 104 Detector S 2550 K 2600 and MW 1 Scan setup window with PDA option KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Advanced Settings 76 Creating an Instrument Control Method A click on the ADVANCED button will open the following dialog box 2550 Advanced Settings L At the peak apex iha m aeee aeai N Cancel At the beginning of slope mAL sec we ja Caneel k the pea Height m0 0 700 Delay min Channel 1 r
214. olds see Parameters on page 168 will be collected in the next empty or predefined vial The selected mode will influence the further set ting possibilities 0 00 Single Event Unconditional 10 00 Single Event Unconditional Peak Recognition D Fig 238 Fraction Collection Program Mode KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 166 OpenLAB Preparative Option EVENT The possible options depend on the selected mode Single Event IRN iin gt 10 00 SingleEvent Signal Level POPC CRC EEE De RAPA ECR ACR OOOO ROC POOP OCCPCORCCPEEEL Signal Slope Saaneareaneeaeaaes e AAAA A AA Signal Lewel Slope Local Maximum Local Minimum Spectral Similarity Fig 239 Fraction Collection Program Event if Mode selection Single Event 0 00 Peak Recognition Signal Level Single Event Signal Slope Signal Level Slope eee 3 E T 1 RRR RRRRRR RRRS Spectral Similarity Fig 240 Fraction Collection Program Event if Mode selection Peak Recognition UNCONDITIONAL Signal independent action at the selected time accordingly to the PARAMETERS setup SIGNAL LEVEL The action takes place according to set level thresholds in the PARAMETERS setup SIGNAL SLOPE The action takes place according to set slope thresholds In the PARAMETERS setup SIGNAL LEVEL SLOPE The action takes place according to set level and slope thresholds in the PARAMETERS setup which can be combined in
215. olume with self defined values It is in your own responsibility to setup a proper value to prevent that the vials will be overtilled The entered vial volume is valid for all vials of the fraction collector If any fraction is larger than the set volume the next free col lection position will be used for continued collection NUMBER OF VIALS The vial number is displayed automatically depending on the number of valve ports If you cascade valves the total number of fraction vials will be shown CONFIGURE VALVE The drop down list offers as many positions as the NUMBER OF VALVES entered above The following settings have to be made for each valve separately VALVE TYPE The drop down list offers 2 6 12 and 16 POSITIONS valves for the Vici Valvo valves additionally 8 and 10 POSITIONS valves Select for each valve the desired type If you read out the valve via LAN KNAURR valves only the appropriate valve type is selected automatically INTERFACE Select the interface you want to use for communication with the device RS 232 Select the number for the RS 232 communication port COM Port on your PC to which the valve is connected LAN KNAUER valves only To let the software search for your already con nected and switched on device click on the button to start the search for all connected LAN devices of the currently configured type The option USE S N To IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT must be enabled Select the desired devic
216. om puter for the optical disk drive the installation screen as seen in the figure below will shown If not please open the optical disk drive with the Windows Explorer or any other installed data manager program lh KNALIER KNAUER extensions for OpenLAB CDS 2 Install KNAUER drivers and extensions OG Adds drivers and extensions for KNAUER instruments to your OpenLAB chromatography data system installation Read release notes PDF Install KNAUER Fraction Collectors Addon This addon enables OpenLAB CDS to control fraction collectors and will add functions allowing to perform automated purification tasks Supported fraction collectors PDF amp Install Generic Drivers use only if required Generic Drivers are customizable drivers for instruments not supported by dedicated OpenLAB or KNAUER drivers The instrument s communication needs to be based on RS 232 and to support an ASCII protocol Read release notes PDF amp Install the KNAUER UHPLC Method Converter Method transfer from HPLC to UHPLC can be easily realized by using the KNAUER U HPLC method converter software tool Online Manual for KNAUER drivers PDF This user manual describes instrument control settings for the different KNAUER HPLC products such as pumps and detectors Visit the KNAUER Website Find latest documents and news about KNAUER products and services on www knauer net Get in touch with us amp BS me amp Browse this installation disk Opens W
217. ommended to leave all components selected Click on NEXT to con firm the settings Knauer HPLC System InstallShield Wizard S M Pump P6 1L MUY Detector UVD2 1L Assistant ASM2 1L J M PLATINbIue e MAutosampler 45 1 V Pump P 1 M Detector MW 1 Fig 3 Drivers to be installed 3 In the next window click on INSTALL to start the installation To cancel the installation procedure click CANCEL r Knauer HPLC System InstallShield Wizard Fig 4 Install HPLC KNAUER System 4 Awindow will open which allows for registration of several required options In the tab AIC please leave the option REGISTER DRIVERS enabled and activate the option ADD WINDOWS FIREWALL EXCEPTION This will add excep KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 11 Installation tions in the Windows firewall to prevent that the Windows firewall blocks the communi cation of OpenLAB processes If a third party firewall is installed on your computer you must set the exceptions manually Please ask your network administrator for support As the AIC name the name of your computer is inserted This registration is required to allow the com puter to control devices If you have already created an administrator in OpenLAB Control Panel you must enter user name and password and select the do
218. on of nest events Expected interval min 0 1 Action Collect To ColectTo Noise threshold Units ET Cees Action s next position 1 41 Please notice that the parameters will be used in the Units selected for the Detection Channel Mec Fig 251 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Local Maximum Parameters Local Maximum RELATIVE TO PREVIOUS EVENT If you check this option you have to enter the relative time shift from the previous event In the Exp time column this time difference is automatically considered The time in this row is displayed blue colored indi cating that there is no further access for free editing USE AS REFERENCE FOR CORRECTION NEXT EVENTS Normally any shift in retention times Is increasing with the magnitude of the retention Using the reference option the software adapts the shift for the calculation of the expected allowed inter val It is possible to set more than one event as reference According to the elapsed run time always the last one will be used for calculation After closing the window the parameter indication will be supplemented by MAX REF MIN REF ACTION NONE selecting this action option neither the recycling valve nor the fractionation valve will be switched The previous action is continued only a marker is set This is useful especially in combination with the option relative to the previous event Thus for instance a collection can be started at a defined
219. on the gt button the Advanced collec tor settings window will open Advanced Collector Settings Rack Settings ee Backed Injections C Exchange rack if full Restart from first vial of current run Empty vials check Adjust FAC table after stacked injection Min allowed empty vials Initial adjust time 1 00 min The run will start only if the number of empty The initial adjust time should always exceed vials exceeds the minimum number of allowed the times between stacked injections empty vials Cancel Fig 234 Advanced collector settings EXCHANGE RACK IF FULL If the option EXCHANGE RACK IF FULL is enabled automatically a new empty rack file will be created if the current one is full A copy of the full rack will be stored the data from the fractions will not be lost This allows changing the rack manually during the sequence without starting the sequence again If this option disabled a sequence will stop if no empty vial is left for the next fraction and an appropriate error message will be displayed If you use this option please make sure that you manually change the rack in time otherwise different fractions may mixed up in the fraction vials EMPTY VIAL CHECK The EMPTY VIAL CHECK tests before the injection if enough empty vials for the fractions are left Enter the number of vials needed for one run The software will check then before the injection if this number of vials is left If not the syste
220. onent A High pressure gradients show up to four components depend ing on the system configuration In case of low pressure gradient pumps three P 2 1L or four S 1050 P 6 1L components will be shown KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Pump Instrument Setup 64 Creating an Instrument Control Method Note OpenLAB does not distinguish the two different LPG valve blocks for the preparative pump P 2 1L refer to the pump s manual The working limits of these blocks are three solvents with a maximum total flow of 220 ml min or two solvents with a maximum total flow of 800 ml min Be sure to select the correct gradient mode for the connected valves other wise the pump or valves may be damaged ACTION AT THE END OF RUN Pumps S 1050 P 2 1L P 6 1L P 1 only Upon selecting this option no action will take place after the run time has elapsed SOLVENT TYPE Pump S 1050 P 2 1L P 1 only COMPRESSIBILITY SOLVENT TYPE Pump P 6 1L Select in the Solvent Type menu the used solvent for a proper compression and flow correction Note that for an LPG pump only one solvent type can be selected Solvent Type Default ka 0 46 Default Default Default beak call Cancel Fig 93 Solvent type settings for pumps S 1050 P2 1 P 1L PRETREATMENT This option enables several pretreatment operations of pumps and valves before injection and starting the data acquisition The run status during a pret
221. op volume 3 x needle volume 2 TRANSPORT POS only available for 3950 ul pick up with tray type 84 3 vials uL PICK UP is selected Select the position of the vial with the transport liquid Available are vials 85 86 and 87 The transport plug is 2 5 x needle volume needle volume tubing volume please refer to the autosampler configura tion chapter page 46 The autosampler itself calculates the liquid level in the transport vials It will be reset to 8000 ul every time if the autosampler is switched off and on Additionally the level can be reset from the autosamplers direct control tab The level cannot be read out from the software If the autosampler calculates that the vial is empty the method sequence will be stopped Dependent on the transport liquid level the autosampler will adapt the needle immersion depth Therefore it is important to fill the transport vials whenever the autosampler is switched off or the transport liquid level is reset manually If a vial is selected as the transport vial the configuration of the vial as a Reagent A or B vial will be ignored SYRINGE SPEED The aspirating speed of the syringe used in injection methods can be adapted depending on the viscosity of the samples the choices are Low NORMAL and HIGH The speed of the syringe during washing or rinsing procedures is not affected by this setting FLUSH VOLUME Enter the amount of sample in ul taken from a vial to preflush the needle before the
222. or message is displayed E Error The 3D data file is too big Please switch the Acquire 3D data option off or decrease the current run time or data rate or spectral range Fig 119 Error message 3D data file too big KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 85 Creating an Instrument Control Method Instrument Setup Conductivity Monitor 2900 CM 2 15S The Conductivity Monitor S 2900 and CM 2 1S support the general detector settings described on page 70 gee Trigger Fig 121 Instrument Setup Conductivity Monitor CM 2 1S ACTION AT THE END OF RUN CM 2 15 ONLY The options are No Action and Standby Upon selecting this option no action will take place after the run time has elapsed The pH and the temperature can be acquired as a trace This must be selected in the Aux Traces tab Instrument Setup Fluorescence Detector RF 20A Axs The spectrofluorescence detectors RF 20A Axs support the general detector set tings described on page 70 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 86 Creating an Instrument Control Method Note The detector RF 20A Axs supports sampling rates up to 5 Hz For higher sampling rates the data acquisition via the 1 V integrator output and a KNAUER interface box or Manager must be used The serial control only allows the same features as know for the detec tor RF 10Axl Please be sure that the detector has a firmware ver sio
223. ore detailed description of the valve group Enter additional information or comments to be printed out when you print the instrument configuration When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument configuration icon list Configuration Managers S 5050 M 1 Interface Box IF 2 IFU 2 1 As with user defined detectors the Manager S 5050 M 1 or Interface Boxes IF 2 IFU 2 1 device must be configured in order to control any user defined instrument necessary for programmed wavelength control pump control switching valve control Please note that the Manager or Interface box must be configured first as described in chapter Configuring the Interface on page 18 Manager IF I O Configuration 1 0 Name Interace Device number Output Cancel Help Fig 71 Configuration window for the Manager S 5050 or M 1 IF 2 IFU 2 1 I O NAME Enter a descriptive name for I O of the manager This name will appear on the manager tab when the instrument setup or status windows are displayed Use a name which is unique within the instrument INTERFACE Select the used and already configured interface type Manager S 5050 or Manager M 1 IF 2 IFU 2 1 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 55 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems DEVICE NUMBER Select the device number The available choices depend on the global interface configuration as described on page 19 OUTPUT Select the
224. ot the driver is compatible with the features of model RF 10Axl and will not support the advanced features of the model RF20A Axs Note The maximum data rate for the RF 20A Axs using the serial port is 5 Hz For higher data rates the 1 V Integrator Output with a KNAUER interface must be used Note The detector may not work on additionally installed serial COM ports It is recommended to connect it with a computer s onboard COM port KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 37 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument configuration icon list Configuration User Defined Detectors The user defined detector can be assigned to any detector or sensor producing an analog signal which can be digitized with A D converters or Interface Boxes Such a detector could be any UV RI or fluorescence detector or some type of pressure flow or temperature sensor etc To use a KNAUER A D converter Interface Box or Manager S 5050 and M 1 it must prior be configured please refer the chapter KNAUER Interface Configu ration on page 19 For each user defined detector in the Configured Modules window double click the icon and complete the configuration dialog box User Defined Detector Configuration Detector _ Signal Mame User Defined Detector Y Ass units mi Model Analog nie YAris multiplier 0 001 Seral Humber Y
225. own list The choices are Add Mix and Wait Click the New button to add one more line to the pro grammed methods The mix method can contain a maximum of 15 program mable lines KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Autosam pler Instru ment Setup 101 Creating an Instrument Control Method ADD Specify the Amount of a liquid in ul max the syringe volume to be aspirated from a source choices are Sample Reagent A Reagent B and Wash and dispensed to a target choices are Sample and Destination Sample ve Reagent m Reagent B Wash pa Sample Destination Fig 140 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Mix Method step Add Note The aspirate and dispense speed depends on the selected syringe and syringe speed The reagents and transport solvent are located at the following positions on the tray only for 84 3 VIAL tray Transport solvent vial 85 Reagent A vial 86 Reagent B vial 87 Mix According the number of Mix Times 1 9 times the programmed Amount ul max the syringe volume will be aspirated and dispensed If no destina tion vial is used the mixing step is performed in the sample vial Amount ul 0 Mix times 1 Fig 141 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Mix Method step Mix WAIT Wait a programmed period of time x xx xx 0 00 00 9 59 59 before continuing with the next step reaction time Wat O h O mn O sec Fig 142 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Mix Method step Wait COMMIT Cl
226. ox 0 eee ee ee eee 65 Configuring Events Digital Outputs 2 67 Editing tools for the time gradient program 68 Create Gradient Dialog ecis tott nEn ee ee ene 69 Possible action at the end of run for pumps S 1050 P 2 1L P 6 1L P 1 69 Detector type independent settings 2 2c eee 70 Instrument Setup detector S 2300 S 2400 71 Instrument Setup detector 10D UVD 2 18 UVD 2 1L S2520 72 Configuring Events Digital Outputs Control 73 Instrument Setup detector S 2550 K2600 and MW 1 74 Detector S 2550 K 2600 and MW 1 Scan setup window with PDA op GLO IM gh E ose ete eas heels cram nce ere a em eee 75 Detector S 2550 advanced setup window 76 Detector K 2600 advanced setup window 06 76 Detector LIME DASEGSCAN hs a hg eye eee nea eee ee ha eee eS 77 Instrument Setup detector DAD 6 1L with PDA option 77 Detector DAD 6 1L wavelength program table 78 Error message 3D datafile too big 2 02 eee eee 79 Detector DAD 6 1L wavelength program table 79 DAD setup SPCCUIUNY gaucdiewad CRESS ae Keo an Rh eee ee Skok 19 Reference correction window DAD 6 1L 2006 80 Instrument Setup detector PDA 1 0 02 ee eee eee 81 Error message regarding too high sample rate if analog out is activated 81 Reference
227. ozero at start 71 RI Detector 2300 Instrument Setup 71 RI Detector 2400 Instrument Setup 71 Right Device Assistant 45 Right tray type Autosampler 3950 49 Right Valve Column Thermostat 109 Thermostat 56 RS 232 10P 25 Autosampler 3950 47 Detector 33 P 2 1L 25 P 2 1S 4 1S 25 P 1 25 Pump 100 25 Pump 1050 25 Switching Valves 53 Thermostat 56 Run Screens Autosampler 95 Run Time Detector 70 Run time Assistant 91 S S 2520 Instrument Setup 71 S 2550 Instrument Setup 74 S 2600 Instrument Setup 77 81 S 2850 Instrument Setup 77 81 Sample DAD Detector 82 Sample Preparation Time Autosampler 103 Sample Vial Autosampler 103 Sampling rate Assistant 91 Detector 70 Scale DAD Detector 80 81 Scan DAD Detector 79 83 Detector 75 Scan if a peak is detected Detector 76 Select Column Column Thermostat 110 Sensitivity Fluorescence Detector 86 87 Serial Number Assistant 43 Autosampler 3950 47 Detector 34 Flowmeter 57 Optimas 51 Pump 26 Thermometer 58 Thermostat 56 User Defined Detector 37 Serial number Interface Bos 19 M 1 19 Manager 5050 19 Serial Port Detector 33 Flowmeter 57 Interface Bos 20 M 1 20 Manager 5050 20 Optimas 51 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 205 Index Thermometer 58 Settings Virtual detector 88 Shift Time Virtual detector 89 Show Assistant 92 Shutter Control Detector 35 Slope Detector 76 Smartline 3050 Use own ports
228. p head RFID based pump head recognition is activated in the pump the pump head cannot be changed COMPONENTS If a gradient mode is to be configured all desired channels com ponents must be enabled If for a LPG pump for example only component A is enabled only channel A is available For an HPG pump system all HPG com ponents must be enabled in each HPG pump If for example a binary HPG is configured the components A and B must be enabled in both pumps CONSTANT PRESSURE MODE This mode is only available for Pump P 6 1L The Con stant Pressure Mode allows running the pump at constant pressure with vari able flow rate also in a gradient system Exiting the configuration window with the OK or CANCEL button will leave the window with the last sent setting Note Pressing the OK button will not send any changed settings Pressing the CANc EL button will not recover the original settings PRESSURE SENSOR PUMP 100 ONLY If your pump 100 is equipped with a pressure sensor please enable the corresponding check box For pumps 20P P 4 1S the box is automatically enabled because these models always have a pressure sensor while models 10P P 2 1S do not have this component here the box is disabled KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 28 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems ADD INFO Click the button ADD INFO to enter more detailed description of the pump Additional Information Error IM Mes
229. parameters for autosamplers on the KNAUER HPLC System and monitor these in real time Configuration Device Communication Port Some devices have two communication ports on the rear panel for controlling the device via the computer One is an RS 232 port also called serial or COM port the other is an Ethernet port also called LAN Local Area Network Other than the KNAUER valve drives for all other devices the desired communication port must be defined in the device Please pay attention to the corresponding notes in this manual and refer to the device s manual for more information about how the desired communication port must be configured Please note that for some devices the functionality depends on the selected communica tion port The KNAUER IFU 2 1 Interface Box only has a USB connector The IFU 2 1 has a build in USB to serial converter Therefore an RS 232 port will be used for the communication If the IFU 2 1 is connected to the computer please check in the Windows Device Manager for the used port number cate gory Ports USB COM Ports The IFU 2 1 USB to serial converter requires a driver for proper functionality The driver can be found on the KNAUER web page or the KNAUER drivers CD for OpenLAB CDS Configuring the Interface In addition to all detectors directly supported in OpenLAB any detector or sen sor producing an analog signal voltage which can be digitized with an A D converter or Interface Box can be use
230. ped with a tray temperature control unit this option can be checked and the desired temperature 4 40 C can be entered The AS 1 and older versions of the 3950 may have only a tray cooling facility 4 22 C WAIT WITH TOLERANCE C The system becomes ready only if the actual tray temperature is inside the set range WAIT TIME min The waiting time is the equilibrating time in minutes after the tray temperature reached the temperature set range before the injection takes place TIMED EVENTS These types of events or methods enable you to control other devices via the two auxiliaries contact closures or to activate a new oven set point Each event can be programmed on a time basis which starts at the moment of injection Click the TIMED EVENTS button to set up the time based methods in the follow ing dialog box Time Based Methods Programmed methods Method type ON Method AL time 1 AUx 1 ON 0 00 01 2 AUA OFF 0 07 00 Time OF h 1 mn 30 sec Delete Cormit a Cancel Fig 138 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 timed events KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Autosam pler Instru ment Setup Mix methods 100 Creating an Instrument Control Method New Click the NEw button to add additional lines to the programmed meth ods Clicking the New button activates the method type drop down menu METHOD TYPE Select one of the available AUX 1 and AUX 2 Both auxiliary AUX
231. post column tempering allows for cooling or warming the solvent flow leaving the column thermostat The temperature range Is 15 35 C Please note that the temperature of the column thermostat during a run can be acquired as an Auxiliary Trace refer to the appropriate chapter below KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 111 Creating an Instrument Control Method Instrument Setup Flowmeter The flowmeter setup is the same for all supported models and is very simple Fig 155 Setup window Flowmeter RUN TIME Enter the desired run time ACQUISITION DELAY Here you can define a delay time between starting the run and the data acquisition KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 112 Creating an Instrument Control Method Instrument Setup SIKA Thermometer B Instrument Setup Run time Acquisition delay Time 10 0427 Minutes Amplitude 254 Wavelength nmi WAN H Fenperature FG Flow fF i Wavelength nr Wavelength nr Fig 156 Setup window SIKA Thermometer Setting up Auxiliary Traces Any configured HPLC system with at least one pump with pressure transducer a column oven or a flowmeter will be completed by an additional tab for auxil lary traces Instrument Setup 5 jE _WLA S 2550 ___ WL 5 2550 Wavelength nm S amp x a z a Fig 157 Setup window Auxiliary Traces Only the selected traces
232. ppear which displays the parameters required for the equipment configured for this instrument O Men u iea M a ee Erma O i File Edit View Method Data Sequence Analysis Control Reports Window Help amp x hod Ib LEELEE 0i D 1 e ST 18 ata cic Met O Too ar 1050 53950 52550 2 lt Aux Traces I Trigger 1 H Syringe speed V Air segment Navigation Panel Sie gee Ne ex S pl pick up Wash times V Needle wash Needle height mm Integration Toolbar Timed event Enable tray cooling Wait with tolerance C 5 Information Bar acked injections Setup Tabs Graphical setup view a Z utes User SYSTEM SYSTEM Project Project Test 1 Idle El vu x D Fig 82 Overview Instrument setup window Smartline Autosampler 3950 For each of configured device you get a separate tab in the instrument setup window Each of these contains several areas where you can enter parameters related to the individual device At the bottom of the screen you will find a unique graph part displaying the wavelength flow gradient and possibly other related profiles With a right hand mouse click you get access to multiple setup possibilities of the profile For details see the OpenLAB Data System Users Guide The definition and setup of triggers see page 113 and auxiliary traces see page 112 must be performed in a separate tab for the whole instr
233. pper APPLY button same line as for the Flow and A values to send the new gradi ent composition to the pumps The program will automatically calculate the value for HPG pump B If the check boxes for Flow and A have been enabled the values for both will be sent to the pumps upon clicking the APPLY button If you wish to update only the A disable the Flow check box PMIN PMAx only for P4 1S Direct Control Enter the desired values for the allowed minimum and maximum system pressure APPLY Click on the APPLY button to send the pressure limits to the pump If the pressure limits are out of acceptable pressure range defined by the mounted pump head an appropriate error message will be shown UV The left hand part of the UV section shows the detector status such as Deu terium lamp status wavelength in nm and signal The signal units depends on the unit selected in the detector s configuration AU mAU AU UV D2 Lamp Oo Lamp OFF WL 254 App J a WL 458 nm 0 040 m l Fig 190 ASM 2 1L status tab UV D2 LAmp The button shows the current lamp status The On state is repre sented by a green active Light Emission Diode LED symbol the Off state including initializing heating is represented by an inactive grey LED symbol _ WL Status WL shows two different values the current wavelength and the signal The wavelength is given in nm while the units for the sign
234. pt the settings This status area is only shown for pumps offering this feature PuRGE Click the PURGE button to open the purge setup window PURGE FLOW In PURGE FLOW enter the desired flow rate START Click on the START button to start the pump GRADIENT COMPONENTS In the GRADIENT COMPONENTS section you can select each solvent channel directly or a ABCD Mix STOP AFTER YOu can set a time limit for the purge Enable the STOP AFTER option and enter the desired purging time Current pressure MPa 0 7 Purge settings Purge flow ml min 0 0 A OB C Stop after Caution Please open the deaseration screw before starting the pump Fig 172 Purge settings window KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Detector Instrument Status 115 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Instrument Status Detectors Instrument Status UV Detectors UVD 2 1L UVD 2 15 MW 1 S 2520 S 2550 50D K 2600 Nearly all UV detector tabs are identical independent of the features of the detector Unavailable features or functions are grayed out and inaccessible The settings for the 50D are similar to the settings for the S 2550 please use the descriptions and notes to the S 2550 System Status 51050 3950 52550 Run Status On e Channel1 254 nm 0 000 Larpfs D2Lamp Lamp OFF Scan nm Start 200 End 500 Digital Channels nm Chi 254 __wLApEIY E
235. pumps S 100 10P 20P P 2 1S and the P 4 1S do not include this column Configure the events by pressing the button which is displayed when you place the cursor on the EVENTs field The following dialog box will appear Events Digital Qutputs Control Events All On ci ot sir 2 TTL Off amp OC allot 30C or 7 Relay s 4 TTL Ott o Relay o meere Fig 95 Configuring Events Digital Outputs The Events Digital Outputs correspond to the outputs available on the rear panel of the pump Select the state for each Event you want to set from the drop down list The choices are OFF 0 ON 1 PULSE P and _ means no change Refer to the pump s user manual for details about digital outputs parameters ALL ON ALL OFF Use the ALL ON or ALL OFF buttons to switch all the outputs either on or off KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 68 Creating an Instrument Control Method Table All time programs are displayed in a spreadsheet similar to the one shown functions below Although the information in the fields will vary the spreadsheets always support certain basic features a inna eee Fill Down Shift Lines eras clue E Anata memes ean aa enn ema O PETUTTTTETUTTRTYTETTT TOUTE TT TTT TTT PTET TTT TT ETT TeTeTT TT TT ETT T TPT eT eer et Teer errr err eT errr rere ret Te Terr rre Terr rrerr rrr TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTETETT See Insert Line Delete Line Delete Lines Impo
236. r Manufacturer Knauer Serial Pott COMI v Model Manager 5050 Box type Manager 5050 Channel 1 4 Range 256 v 50 Hz Cancel Help Fig 16 Manager S 5050 configuration window The KNAUER Interface Boxes and the Manager S 5050 and M 1 require the same parameters to be set up Therefore the configuration dialogs for these devices are nearly identical NUMBER OF BOXES Select the NUMBER OF BOXES used in the system OpenLAB sup ports up to 4 KNAUER Interfaces of the same type CONFIGURE BOX Use CONFIGURE BOX to select the box number you wish to configure Each box has to be configured separately SERIAL NUMBER Type in the SERIAL NUMBER of the Interface you are using The serial number is used for the device identification and addressing during serial com munications This serial number should match the serial number of the Inter face Box As the serial number please use the last 5 digits of the KNAUER serial number of the device If the first of these digits is a 0 zero please enter only KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 20 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems the last 4 digits If you try to click OK without a serial number the following message will appear Configuration error Please specify a serial number Fig 17 Error message for missing serial number SERIAL PORT select the port number for the communication port on your PC to whi
237. rate for the virtual detector is set to 2 Hz If no data points of the original chromatogram remain the virtual detector will show a value of O zero SETTINGS The SETTINGS button will become accessible when Data File is selected Clicking on it will call up the following dialog box Select Data File Browse C Shift Time min Cancel Fig 125 Virtual detector setup data file selection Settings The last file selection will be displayed You can either enter a new file or use Select Data the Browse button to locate file File Note To avoid possible signal distortion the Y Axis multiplier in the con figuration of the virtual detector must be equal to that of the selected data file KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 89 Creating an Instrument Control Method The dialog box which appears includes in the upper part the typical Windows searching facilities Additionally you can search using the SAMPLE ID and or the ANALYST H Open Data File Look in J Resutt 5 et Ey Uul Mame Date modified Type No items match your search 4 r File name Files of type Sea ana a Find files that match these criteria sample ID Created any time Find Now Analyst Modified any time New Search Search results Fig 126 Virtual detector setup data file selection Use the TRACE column fields to select the required trace if more than one is available in
238. re shown by highlighting in the correspond ing colors Refer to the chapter INSTRUMENT SETUP FRACTION COLLECTOR begin KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 180 OpenLAB Preparative Option ning page 161 E Instrument Setup 2 vD Virtual FC ae Trigger Detection Channel YD V Collector Reset Pump not defined Flow ml min 50 000 Actualize flow Fraction Collection Program 56 Single Event Signal Level Slope 1 i Single Event Signal Level Slope i Waste Single Event Signal Level Slope i 2 Single Event Signal Level Slope i Waste Single Event Signal Level Slope Single Event Local Maximum Single Event Local Maximum Single Event Unconditional Wooo z gt Select E Fraction feil Peak recycling a Solvent recycling Fig 260 Instrument Setup Fraction collector Running method Fraction Annotations The fractions as well as the fraction and vial numbers can be shown in the chro matogram in the Instrument Status Open the chromatogram s annotations RIGHT MOUSE CLICK ON THE CHROMATOGRAM Annotation Select FRACTIONS from the drop down menu and add FRACTION and or VIAL NUMBER using the green arrow key In the menu OTHER on the bottom of the menu window please enable the option FRC ACTUAL to show the selected annotations Be sure to have selected the correct Trace for your settings MES 2550 Channel 1 Time 31 2057 Minutes Amplitu
239. re to integrate this chro matogram Validation of integration x Aeterence chiomstogram Anais daatile D Proecte VELLCH TARCHPL TEs Valkberizoate reterence det Woewy repait Gausman sequence a fll et i Chee ifs 15 Fig 209 Validation of integration dialog window real chromatogram ANALYZE To perform the validation procedure just press the ANALYZE button All integration parameters are preset and cannot be altered If you had previously changed the integration events the validation will not be performed and the following information box will be displayed SS UU x x No Validation will be performed The following Integration Events table should be used for the Yalidation procedure Event Start time Stop Time Value Width 0 000 0 000 0 2 Threshold 0 000 0 000 50 0 No Manual Integration Fixes should be used Please change the Integration Events and try again Fig 210 Validation of integration attempt with manual integration fixes KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 147 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options The only integration parameter which can be modified is the baseline drift when using the Gaussian sequence Check this option to consider a baseline drift of 10 Press the ANALYZE button to repeat the validation procedure aeaea O OoOO a _ ar io Wo Y COo VI e MII y ei St Fig 211 Validation of integration with baseline drift
240. reatment is EQUILIBRATING Note The pretreatment was developed for special operation in prepara tive HPLC such as filling a preparative sample loop or direct injec tion on the column using a pump It is highly recommended not to use the pretreatment for other reasons or to combine it with other pre run features such as the baseline check KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Pretreat ment 65 Creating an Instrument Control Method Checking the pretreatment option the SETUP button becomes active Clicking on it the following dialog box is opened Pump Program Cancel For pretreatment zera time is considered to be the injection time Please use negative times to program the pretreatment tine table Fig 94 Pretreatment setting dialog box The appearance of the pretreatment s pump program is similar to that of the main pump setup window It must be edited in the same way as described below CONFIGURING PUMP PROGRAM To add a new line make a right mouse click in the table and select Insert line from the menu The only difference with regards to the main pump setup is that negative times must be entered because they are relative to the zero injection time Furthermore if the ENTER key is pressed no new program line will be entered but the setup window will close During a pretreatment no data acquisition is possible Note If a pretreatment is to be defined for more than one instrument
241. red Services Server is used It is highly recommended to do so before running a method Note Using the preparative option requires a higher data rate as usual for preparative HPLC 5 Hz data rate minimum is highly recom mended The recognition of peaks for fractionation will not work with narrow peaks as known from UHPLC This configuration window differs in one respect from other setup windows It is not only important for setting up the fraction collector You need it also during the runs However those aspects will be described later in the chapter instrument status of a control method page 177 A Instrument Setup S s 1050 s 3950 E JetStream Oven s 2600 E S 3050FC 2 lt Aux Traces I Trigger Detection Channel S 2600 Channel1 v V Collector Reset Flow ml min acc to Pump S 1050 v Rack configuration Path C Enterprise Projects Gr T est local Method rack_2013 07 30_1 1ck Single Event Single Event L 0 5 10 waste gt at the end of run Pretreatment Setup E Faction D Peak recycling B Solvent recycling Fig 233 Instrument Setup Fraction collector DETECTION CHANNEL Select from the drop down list of active detector channels that one to be used for fractionations Please make sure that the selected detector channel will not be disabled in the method otherwise no fractions can be collected The fraction collectors option can just handle data from on
242. rol Method STOP Click on the STOP button to set the flow rate to O zero PMIN PMAx only for P4 1S Direct Control Enter the desired values for the allowed minimum and maximum system pressure The pump will immediately stop if the maximum pressure value is exceeded or if the pressure is below the minimum value for 30 seconds The unit depends on the pressure unit selected in the pump s configuration MPa bar or psi Please check for the pressure unit shown in the Status section of the pump APPLY Clicking the APPLY button to sends the pressure limits to the pump If the pressure limits are out of acceptable pressure range defined by the mounted pump head an appropriate error message will be shown HPG only if an HPG ts configured The left hand part of the HPG section shows the pump status such as FLow in ml min the gradient COMPONENTS in and PRESSURE depending on the selected unit in MPa bar or psi HFG Flow ml min 0 000 Flow ml min A I stop Components 100 0 0 000 100 Apply Pressure MFa 0 0 Pain oo Peas 0 0 Apply Fig 189 Instrument Status ASM 2 1L HPG FLow Status The FLow shown here is the current flow of both pumps set either by direct control or a method COMPONENTS The COMPONENTS show the current pump gradient set either by direct control or a method PRESSURE only for P4 1S Status The shown PRESSURE is the current system pressure measured by the pump
243. ror message will be generated in the case that the method is started with incorrectly entered serial numbers In this case the serial number must be corrected in the instrument configuration The active state of the communication with an instrument is represented by the green amp symbol Only in this case you will have access to the Device Infor mation Click the button to read out the device information from the device Infor mation about the serial number device name and instrument software ver sions will appear Reading out this information means the device is really connected and can be used to run a method Device Information Serial Mo Device Software wersion CBATZ 1000001 T 1 01 00 Refresh Select Fig 164 Device Information about the connected instrument s KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Pump Instrument Status 109 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Instrument Status Pumps All pump tabs are identical independent of the features of the pump The inte gration of the pump into an HPG or LPG system will also not change the appearance of this window tab Unavailable features and functions are grayed out and inaccessible Instrument Status rele System Status 51050 53950 2550 Run Status On Flow ml min 2 000 Stop Flow Apply Flow ml min 1 000 Solvent Factor 0 46 Flow amp Gradient Apply Pressure MPa o o ST v 0 Grad
244. rt Gradient Create Step Gradient Fig 96 Editing tools for the time gradient program Each row Is assigned a program line number and TIME in minutes followed by columns for information for each time in the program Rows and field informa tion can be cut copied pasted and deleted To open the context menu with these commands right click anywhere within the spreadsheet To select a field click on that field to highlight it To select a row click on a number in the column to highlight the entire row The available table functions are shown in a context menu Click on the desired function to execute FILL DOWN This enables you to automatically copy the value of the selected field down through all fields below SHIFT LINES Allows changing the time for the currently selected line A window will open to enter the desired time shift As an example a time shift of 2 00 min for a line at 10 00 min will change the time to 12 00 min A negative time shifts to an earlier time For example to shift the time of a line at 10 00 min to 9 00 min enter 1 00 min The time of all following lines will be changed ade quately That means if for a line the time will be shifted by 2 minutes the time of all lines below will also be shifted by 2 minutes INSERT LINE This command inserts a copy of the line in the spreadsheet below where the cursor is located DELETE LINE This command deletes the line in the spreadsheet where the cursor
245. run Such injections can only be programmed either for the autosampler 3950 and AS 1 or the injection module please refer the FRC section chapter Stacked Injections of this manual As the peak table cannot be adjusted automatically if several injections per run were made this operation is only useful for preparative chromatography Click on the STACKED INJECTIONS button to open the Stacked Injections Table dialog box USE STACKED INJECTION Check this box in order to activate the settings in this dia log box Stacked Injection Table Injection method Full loop max inj volume 100 ul Start sample preparation 0 25 min before stacked injection C Do not wash the needle between injections from same vial AL The actual time s of the stacked injection s may deviate from that programmed Fig 143 Autosampler 3950 AS 1 Stacked Injection Table INJECTION METHOD The injection method is the same as that defined in the instrument setup of the autosampler It cannot be selected separately for the stacked injections START SAMPLE PREPARATION X XX MIN BEFORE STACKED INJECTION Define the time before the injection time the autosampler should start with the sample injec tion preparation Please make sure that the selected time Is sufficient to prepare the injection before the injection time arrives otherwise the injection may be delayed If the autosampler is ready to inject it will wait until the programmed time for the stacked inje
246. running the status HOLD is displayed VALVES STATUS DIRECT CONTROL The actual position for each valve is displayed in the Position row SET POSITION To switch the valves specify the required positions and click on the SET POSITION button The choices for a KNAUER 2 position valve are BLANK L Load and I Inject for a Vici 2 position valve BLANK A Load and B Inject 1 through to 6 for a 6 position valve 1 through to 8 for a 8 position valve 1 through to 10 for a 10 position valve 1 through to 12 for a 12 position valve and 1 through to 16 for a 16 position valve The BLANK space means that the valve will not change its state after pressing the SET POSITION button KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 138 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method If for any reason the communication to a valve is interrupted the correspond ing field for the valve position is highlighted and the position is indicated as zero KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 139 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Instrument Status Column Oven CT 2 1 Jetstream T 1 Basic and T 1 dow He a x gt i al eae all VD Bi m f f ica eo System Status a cT21 EA vDo P User System Tester Project GrPCPMSWTEST1_lo Idle ia Fig 198 Instrument Status Column Thermostat CT 2 1 oO System Status TA Mw t System Status EJ JetStream Oven e UVD21L se 4SM2 1L P Fi
247. s of a Running Control Method The integration time is internally checked before every run If not enough light can be detected a single run will be aborted with an appropriate error mes sage In a sequence run the sequence will not be aborted and the data will be acquired but OpenLAB will add a message into the instrument activity log that there was not enough light SHUTTER The shutter will interrupt the light beam between lamp and the fiber optics This will considerate the fiber optics if no run is performed Additionally it allows for measuring the dark signal dark signal signal without light came from the noise of electronic components of the device The dark signal can be subtracted from the measurement signal to suppress the electronic noise To acquire data from a sample the shutter must be opened SCAN This area is used to specify spectral parameters used for your test mea surements The range displays the minimum and maximum wavelengths avail able for the detector The minimum and maximum wavelengths are the limits which are defined by the configuration of the detector START AND END OF SCAN The scan range sets the limits for the test scan The max imum range is defined by the device specification BANDWIDTH The bandwidth is a measure of the range over which the calcula tions and measurements are used to calculate the intensity for a particular wavelength For example with a 10 nm bandwidth the intensity for 250
248. s of the ASM You must then uncheck the option Use S N to identify the instrument to enter the IP address In case you use the IP address instead of the serial number please make sure that the ASM has a fix IP address manual and not a dynamic DHCP Otherwise you may check for the IP address with every start of the ASM KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Autosam pler Config uration 46 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems 4 The IP port must be selected as follow If the IP port of the ASM is 10001 default the IP port of the left hand device in the ASM housing has the IP port 10002 the middle device 10003 and the right hand device 10004 5 Manually enter all required configuration data e g pump head or number of valve positions The device configuration cannot been read out by using the button 6 If a device is configured separately it must not be configured in the ASM In the ASM configuration select for the mentioned device s None 7 If you also use a fraction valve in the ASM along with the other devices for the Injection Module it is recommended to configure it as a MultiValve frac tion collector instead of using it as a fraction valve in the ASM The configura tion procedure is the same as described above In this case please remove the ASM completely from your configuration Note If one or more modules of the ASM will be controlled separately the modules must be removed
249. s pressure unit Please note that also a pres sure may be measured if the pump is stopped e g if another pump is running or if the flow path is blocked The right hand part of the HPG section allows for direct control of the pumps independently of the method setup Please note that only A can be entered the B component of the gradient will be automatically calculated by the software Only a parameter for which the check box is enabled can be edited and the changed value will be send by clicking the ApPLy button FLow Direct Control To enter a flow enable the Flow check box Once enabled you can enter a flow which will be the resulting flow of both pumps Click on the upper Apply button same line as for the Flow and A values to start the pumps or change the current flow If the flow rate is out of the accept able flow range defined by the mounted pump head an appropriate error message will be shown If the check boxes for Flow and A have been enabled the values for both will be sent to the pumps upon clicking the APPLy button If you wish to update only the flow or gradient disable the A check box STOP Click on the STOP button to set the flow rate to O zero KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 131 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method A If the corresponding check box is enabled you can change the gradient composition Enter the desired value for HPG pump A and click on the u
250. s the time of injection of the sample The maximum run time is 999 minutes If a run is started without a trigger trigger is set to none the pro gram of the devices may not start at the same time This can result in varying retention times of components in different runs PRESSURE Only P 2 1L P 6 1L in isobar mode Enter the desired system pressure The pump will vary the flow if the pressure in the system changes The pres sure unit depends on the unit selected in the pump s instrument configuration The minimum time step between two time lines is 0 25 min Comp A Comp D only if a gradient mode different from isocratic is selected Enter the solvent composition for your run The solvent composition can be selected in 1 steps only Always a linear change will be executed when two consecutive lines contain different values For example if in the first line at 0 00 min the solvent composition is defined as 100 A and 0 B and in the next line at 2 00 min 0 A and 100 B the solvent composition at 1 00 min will be 50 A 50 B If a step gradient is required please add two lines for the smallest possible time step For example if you add a line at 5 00 min 60 A and 40 B and at 5 02 min 30 A 70 B the change from 60 A to 30 A will be executed within 1 2 seconds which corresponds to a step EVENTS Digital Outputs This option is given only for the pumps S 1050 P 2 1L P 6 1L and P 1 The spreadsheets for the
251. sage Fig 32 Additional information box Enter additional information or comments to be printed out when you print the instrument configuration Note Without the correct serial number the communication with the pumps cannot be established When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument configuration icon list Configuration KNAUER Detectors The configuration dialog boxes of the supported detectors differ only slightly from each other Differences can be found in Interfaces lamps and number of channels For detectors with a Leak sensor an option for the Leak sensor sensi tivity is added For DAD detectors the Shutter can be enabled disabled There fore the appearance of the corresponding detector configuration windows is nearly identical The settings for the 50D are similar to the settings for the S 2550 please use the descriptions and notes to the S 2550 Detector DAD6 1L Configuration Interace LAN r HEJ Obtained using 5 N Name DADS 1L Serial Number FOJ141800001 IP Fort 10007 EE E A V Use S N to identify the instrument Options Chn Wame 1 Channel 1 Opes son D2 Lamp V Halogen Lamp Chn Name 2 Channel V Shutter Control Chn Name 3 Channel 3 Leak Sensor Sensitivity low Chn Name 4 Channel 4 Y Axis mA we Flow Cell Cancel Help Fig 33 Detector DAD 6 1L configuration window KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1
252. scriptive line There the vial number the begin and end of collection and the collected volume is displayed see the red markers in figure 258 If you select a fraction position by a mouse double click while you hold the lt C7RL gt key on your computer keyboard the software will open the corre sponding chromatogram for this fraction This will not work if the chromato gram was renamed or moved from the original path KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 179 OpenLAB Preparative Option MultiValve Fraction Collector For this fraction collector the rack view is integrated into the instrument status tab The appearance of the rack view again depends on the configured valves If different valves are combined the graphical separation may not be shown The number of displayed positions also may exceed the actual existing number of collection positions due to the rectangular arrangement but in reality not existing positions will not been used for fractionation o e System Status J 5 1050 GY 5 3950 E JetStream Oven s 2600 L Valeo MV FC Monitor Direct Control se Fig 259 Instrument status MultiValve fraction collector Differing from other instrument setup windows that of the fraction collector is also valuable during the run In the lower part the measured chromatogram will be displayed as it is in progress Additionally the areas of fractions peak recycling and solvent recycling a
253. se has expired Click Add to add a license file Files Filename Host MAC Address Status x EL Instruments R Administration Your startup license has expired Welcome SYSTEM Fig 10 OpenLAB EE License overview 2 Click BROWSE to select the path The license file is stored Add Licenses x Add licenses for OpenLAB products Enter either the license file that was sent to you or its contents Select a license file 1 Paste the contents of a license file Fig 11 Add licenses menu 3 Select license file and click Open i ffnen Suchen in J LicenseP2E6B03E 6F c kz nderungsdatum Zuletzt besucht i Desktop 485b391970ee lic 03 07 2012 10 02 LIC Datei S Bibliotheken f e A Computer C Netzwerk 4 LLS Dateiname 001f29425673 ic 7 Dateityp License Files lic Abbrechen E seers Fig 12 Select path to the license file Add Licenses x Add licenses for OpenLAB products Enter either the license file that was sent to you or its contents Select a license file M Grothe OpenLABilicensing LicenseP2E6B03E6F 00 129425673 lic Paste the contents of a license file lt lt Fig 13 Add licenses menu with license path 4 Click OK the license has been installed KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 15 Installation Driver Update A driver update is provided as a full version and will no
254. set Note Please note that the Offset is calculated using the Y Axis Multiplier For example to change the Offset by 2 mV if the Multiplier is set on 0 001 a value of 2000 must be entered for the Offset Negative Multipliers are allowed ADD INFO Click the button Add Info to enter more detailed description of the detector Enter additional information or comments to be printed out when you print the instrument configuration When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument configuration icon list KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 39 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Configuration Virtual Detector To configure a virtual detector you have only to open and to close the configu ration window without any additional entering But you can modify the NAME Y AXIS UNITS and Y AXIS MULTIPLIER if desired The Y axis multiplier is to correct the unit of the signal which will be acquired It also can be used to amplify if very weak signals are to simulate Virtual Detector Configuration Detector name Y Ass unite Asis multiplier Cancel Help Fig 52 Virtual detector configuration window Note To avoid possible signal distortion the Y Axis multiplier in the con figuration of the virtual detector must be equal to that of the selected data file selected as data source Detector Connections If a detector is not supported in OpenLAB but is equipped with a
255. setup window without an entered serial number Note Ifthe setup is not started with administration access RUN AS ADMINIS TRATOR you can not store the configuration Configuring the KNAUER HPLC System In order to access commands for control of KNAUER devices you must config ure them appropriately An instrument can only be configured if a project has already been created The Online Help will help creating a project and an instrument You can also refer to the OpenLAB CDS Users Manual on OpenLAB installation disk 4 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 21 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Note If you use user accounts in OpenLAB you must have the right to create instruments and projects and to configure an instrument Instrument Configuration Configuration KNAUER HPLC System For already existing instruments right mouse click on the instrument and select the CONFIGURE INSTRUMENT Command or click CONFIGURE INSTRUMENT in the toolbar The Instrument Configuration dialog will appear where detectors pumps and further devices for the instrument can be defined Create Refresh i B Edit Edit Select Notifications Columns Printer instruments and Locations Properties Navigation Name A Project Instruments Status Location Fig 18 Instrument selection window Several icons will be displayed in the AVAILABLE MODULES box on the left Add modules to be configured by
256. t on the pump s display can be changed for the pumps P 1 P 2 1L in the pump s own menu all others always show MPa The pump P 6 1L uses the pressure unit selected in the software s pump configuration KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Pump Con figuration Service Pump Con figuration 27 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems MIXING CHAMBER P 6 1L only Choose the used mixing chamber The choices are lt NONE gt 50 ul 700 ul 200 ul and350 ul The LPG Cycle Time for the LPG valves will be calculated by the pump in regard of the selected mixing chamber volume LEAK SENSOR SENSITIVITY P 2 1L and P 6 1L only Select the leak sensor s sensitiv ity in accordance with your requirements The choices are OFF Low MEDIUM and HIGH CONFIG SERVICE P 1 P 2 1L 1050 only Click the button CONFIG SERVICE to enter the Pump Configuration Setup window of the pump This will only work if the pump is connected via LAN Pump Configuration Service Head 110 mil Gradient Mode LPG Components wa Fe FIC EIC Fig 31 Pump Configuration Setup window of pump S 1050 P 1 P 2 1L READ WRITE Using the READ button you can read out the pump head and gradi ent configuration If this is done also the WRITE button will be active You can change the settings for pump head and gradient and send these settings to the pump using the WRITE button Note that if the auto detection for the pum
257. t data Serial number Firmware version Firmware subversion Instrument installation date Last service date Last service code Board working time Grating motor time Optical properties Bandwidth Wavelength accuracy Integration time Lamp power supply Serial number Firmware version Operation time Deuterium lamp Installation date Serial number Operation time Lamp ignitions Halogen lamp when Installation date installed Serial number Operation time SIGNAL The actual signal is indicated in this field WAVELENGTH The actual wavelength is indicated in this field Direct Control If the direct control option should also be available during a run it must be enabled in the RUNTIME SETTINGS see Fig 203 on page 142 AUTOZERO Click this button to define the current signal as the baseline zero level D2 LAmp The On state of the lamp is represented by an active green LED sym bol the Off state is represented by an inactive gray LED symbol 4 LAMP OFF LAMP ON Clicking on the Lamr OFF button will after confirmation switch the lamp off and change the button label to LAMP ON KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 117 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Note For most detectors a change of the lamp status via LAMP OFF LAMP ON will change the start inital lamp status in the detector If the sta tus is Off and the detector will be switched off the lamp will not start if the detector will
258. t the type of detector you want to configure from the drop down list Names Type Ly Serial Humber Fig 46 Detector type selection For some detectors this field is not accessible because no choices are possible INTERFACE SERIAL PORT Select from the drop down list the serial port for the communication port on your PC where the instrument is connected Note Each device controlled via RS 232 must be connected to its own COM port INTERFACE MW 1 S 2550 S 2520 10D UVD 2 1S K 2600 CM 2 1S only Select the Interface you want to use for communication with the device gt Interface L Fig 47 Available interfaces for detectors MW 1 S 2550 S 2520 10D UVD 2 1S K 2600 CM 2 15 For detectors UVD 2 1L PDA 1 and S 2850 only communication via LAN is supported For detectors S 2600 and K 2600 only serial communication is available RS 232 Select the number for the RS 232 communication port COM Port on the PC onto which the detector is connected NETWORK K 2600 only The Network number corresponds with the COM port the device is connected with Note If the detectors S 2520 or S 2550 are controlled via RS 232 in the detector s own setup the N7TERFACE must be set to RS232 115200 Please refer to the detector s manual chapter SETUP MENU for more information Note The detectors S 2550 MW 1 S 2520 and 10D UDV 2 1S have a lim ited data rate max 10 Hz with a serial RS 232 connection
259. t to use this option click the check box Configuration Virtual Fraction Collector Virtual FC Configuration FC Name Virtual FC Tubing Parameters Serial Number Sly 7 Peak Recycling Rack Type Micro Number of Viale 240 Vial Volume ml 20 Serial Port Port Settings Add Info Cancel Help Fig 227 Virtual Fraction Collector configuration window The virtual fraction collector is a tool to optimize the fractionation without need for sample or eluents Therefore only opening and closing the configura tion window would be sufficient However you have two areas for individual settings FC NAME Enter a descriptive name for the fraction collector This name will appear on the fraction collector tab when the instrument setup or status win dows are displayed The default fraction collector name will be suggested auto matically upon selecting the detector type SERIAL NUMBER You Can type a serial number RACK TYPE Select from the drop down list the rack type best in comparison with your real one The choices are Micro with 240 20 ML vials STANDARD with 120 50 ML and PREPARATIVE with 48 250 ML vials The NUMBER OF VIALS will be dis played automatically KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 158 OpenLAB Preparative Option VIAL VOLUME The rack dependent value will be displayed automatically How ever you are able to overwrite it with self defined values to adapt it t
260. t update your existing driver installation The previous version must be completely removed from the computer before the new version can be installed To update the drivers please use the supplied instruction KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 16 Mobile Control with OpenLAB Mobile Control with OpenLAB To use the Mobile Control in combination with OpenLAB follow these steps Turn all main power switches on Make sure that all devices are connected to a Wi Fi router safely Start the OpenLAB EE software Open an already configured instrument or create a new one and open it Start the Mobile Control Create a system configuration in the Mobile Control Press the Apply but ton on the Mobile Control to establish the connection to the devices Ss aN a i If a program of the Mobile Control is running it is possible to configure the system with OpenLAB but it is not possible to open the instrument and to load a method This is only possible if the program of the Mobile Control has ended KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 17 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Sys tems Toolbar Navigation Panel Information Bar Display Links Panel This manual contains detailed information on the use of the OpenLAB EZChrom Edition instrument control software option for the KNAUER Instru ments It contains information on how to configure set up a
261. the correct lamp type is selected LEAK SENSOR SENSITIVITY UVD 2 1L and DAD 6 1L only Select the Leak sensor s sensitivity in accordance with your requirements The choices are OFF Low MEDIUM and HIGH SHUTTER CONTROL Detector S 2850 S 2600 PDA 1 an DAD 6 1L only The shutter allows for a dark current correction and will prevent the fiber optics from going blind Please only disable the shutter upon the request of the KNAUER customer support e g to check if the shutter is defective PORT SETTINGS Spectrofluorometric detector RF 20A Axs FW 0 09 only Port settings Baud Aate 4600 g Cancel Data Bits Parity Even parity Stop Bits Fig 49 Port setting dialog box Select the settings using the pull down menus BAUD RATE 9600 DATA BITS 8 PARITY Even parity Odd parity or No parity STOP BITS 1 KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 36 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Note The default value for parity in OpenLAB is EVEN PARITY For RF 20A Axs the parity default setting in the device currently is No Please check in the device for the correct setting Refer to the description below how to do this A proper connection normally is only possible via onboard COM ports The port settings must coincide with the RS 232 parameters set in the detector s own menu To control the detector via RS 232 the detector must be set into serial mode as described below The
262. the data file SHIFT TIME MIN After checking the SHIFT TIME option you can enter the desired time difference e g for correcting time delays of serial arranged detectors A positive shift time will shift the chromatogram to later retention times a nega tive shift time to earlier retention times When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument setup Source EXTERNAL SOURCE The SETTINGS button also becomes accessible Clicking on it the following dialog box appears Select Channel Cancel Fig 127 Virtual detector setup channel selection You can select from the drop down menu one of the detectors or detector channels accessible in the configured system KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Detector Instrument Setup 90 Creating an Instrument Control Method Note To avoid possible signal distortion the Y Axis multiplier in the con figuration of the virtual detector must be equal to that of the selected data file ARGUMENT Y This option becomes accessible if the Argument X field is acti vated The setting dialogs for Y are than the same as for X RESULTING FORMULA X Y You can either fill in the desired formula or you can select it from the drop down menu providing all of the formulas used before Formula possibilities Following functions constants and operations will be supported Functions SIN COS TG ASIN ATG EXP LG log10 LN In SH hyperbolic
263. the pumps will immedi ately stop the flow If the measured pressure is less than the MIN limit for more than 30 seconds the pump will also stop This CONTROL PRESSURE LIMITS Option is not accessible in the case of the pump 10P P 2 1S or S 100 without pressure transducer Fig 90 Pressure limits in pump setup window If the MIN and MAX limits are set to 0 the software will not check the pressure and the limits will only be monitored by the pump internally X The pressure is out of acceptable For the pumphead range 0 0 40 0 MPa Fig 91 Error message when pressure limits are out of range MAXIMUM MINIMUM PRESSURE P 6 1L Enter the minimum pressure allowable for your pump The zero setting disables the shut down due to minimum pres sure If the MIN and MAX limits are set to 0 the software will not check the pressure and the limits will only be monitored by the pump internally MAX PRESSURE MODE P 6 1L If the maximum pressure is reached there are two options for the pump behavior STOP Pump will stop the pump immediately while HOLD MAX PRESSURE allows a flow range to be defined at which to run the pump at the selected maximum pressure Hold Constant Pressure Settings Control Flow Limits ml min Minimum Flow Maximum Flow Fig 92 Setup for P 6 1L Hold Max Pressure SOLVENT S Solvent description in pump setup window The number of dis played rows depends on the configuration lsocratic systems only show the comp
264. timal values KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Detector Instrument Setup 79 Creating an Instrument Control Method The 3D data acquisition size is limited If this limit is exceeded due to the cur rent settings an error message is displayed To reduce the 3D data acquisition size the runtime data rate or spectrum range must be decreased P The 3D data file is too big Please switch the Acquire 3D data option SA off or decrease the current run time or data rate or spectral range Fig 110 Error message 3D data file too big Use REF For the detector a reference correction wavelength is set by default Adjust the wavelength to your needs or disable the box if no reference correc tion is required The reference correction can be selected to reduce the apparent noise of a sig nal by subtracting a reference signal from the target signal For instance referring to a wavelength with practically zero absorption the drift due to a too short heating time of the lamp can be eliminated Depending on to the configuration for each channel are reference correction wavelength can be activated Note The reference correction can influence the peak size WL REF Set the desired reference wavelength Refer to the compounds spec trum to find the optimum reference wavelength BW REF Refer to the bandwidth BW section above WAVELENGTH PROGRAM Fig 111 Detector DAD 6 1L wavelength program ta
265. time after the set conditions are met FRACTION POSITION This field is only informative according to the settings in the parameter window Either the defined vial position is displayed or NEXT for the first free vial position The first free vial position is defined a the position which is not used and not reserved by program starting at position 1 It not means the next free position seen from the current position Further possibilities are WASTE PEAK RECYCLING SOLVENT RECYCLING and in case of action NONE 0 00 is dis played In case of COLLECT SLICES always NEXT is shown FRACTION CHECK If this option is checked any run will be interrupted if the defined fractionation conditions are not met It is not possible to continue such an interrupted run directly In case of peak recognition mode this option cannot be used Note The last line in a fraction collection program must always set on mode SINGLE EVENT event UNCONDITIONAL parameter WASTE to pre vent that if a run is finished the fraction collector is still collecting KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 174 OpenLAB Preparative Option CHROMATOGRAM WINDOW Instrument Setup o nea E s 1050 s 3950 E JetStream Oven m9 s 2600 E S 3050FC 3 Aux Traces R Trigger 5 10 at the end of run V Pretreatment I Fraction B Peak recycling P Solvent recycling Fig 252 Fraction collector setup window lower part This area
266. timed events If the Stop Events at Time box is not checked the end time is equal to the analysis time the run time The maximum Stop events time is 9 h 59 min 59 sec Note If the END time exceeds the programmed run time this END time overrules the analysis time for the autosampler The next injection will be started as soon as the timed events program has finished When complete click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the instrument setup Autosam MIX METHODS Click the MIX METHODS button to create a program of sample pler Instru preparation in the Mix Methods dialog box ment Setup Mix program Moo Method Parameters Hew Delte Commit Cancel Fig 133 Autosampler KNAUER Optimas Mix Methods Mix New Click the New button to add additional lines to the Mix program Clicking Methods the New button activates the method type drop down menu METHOD TYPE Select the METHOD TYPE from the drop down list The choices are ADD Mix and Wait Click the NEw button to add additional lines to the pro grammed methods The mix method can contain a maximum of 15 program mable lines ADD Specify the amount of a liquid in ul max the syringe volume to be aspi rated from a source choices are SAMPLE REAGENT A REAGENT B and WASH and dispensed to a target choices are SAMPLE and DESTINATION Sample eagent 4 axils Reagent B Sample Wash Destination Fig 134 Autosampler Mix Method step Add
267. tion collector If a MultiValve FC is selected you can combine up to 32 valves as one fraction collector valve cas cading If a valve in an ASM should be used as a fraction collector please select the appropriate option in the ASM configuration Here only one valve can be con figured the valve cascading cannot be applied The configuration options for the fraction collectors are mainly the same for several fraction collectors Therefore the configuration procedure is nearly identical Only the configuration of the MultiValve FC and Virtual FC have been described separately Note For the fraction collectors Foxy R1 and R2 you must set the internal option Inject to None otherwise the sampler may move randomly to position 1 during fractionation FC Smartline 3050 Configuration Racks FC Name 5 3050 FC Tubing Parameters Rack Type 1 12 mm vials low ki Serial Number ional na RG nena saun E m Slv 7 Peak Recycling Intertace AS 232 Rack Type 3 12 mm vials low k COM Port COM Rack Type 4 12 mm vials low ka Baud Aate 19200 z Number of Vials 192 Vial Vol o 15 ae ial Volume rn Add Info Fig 221 Fraction collector S 3050 configuration window KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Fraction Collector Configura tion Interface 154 OpenLAB Preparative Option FC Foxy R1 Configuration FC Name Foxy Al FC Tubing Parameters Seria
268. to this tt may happen that in some cases the threshold will not be registered as fulfilled despite being true for two consecutive data points KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 171 OpenLAB Preparative Option EVENT The settings using the slope and the level are again quite similar to perform SIGNAL The only difference is that both the level and slope values are to be used as LEVEL SLOPE thresholds Cramesin E Collect To g Collect To kai net O Tat Fig 248 Fraction Collection Program Peak Recognition Signal Level Slope Parameters Additionally you have to select either the AND option meaning that both condi tions must been exceeded or the OR option meaning that only one of these conditions must be exceeded This can be defined differently for the ascending and descending flange of the peak After closing the window the parameters will be designed for example as L AND S L OR S for SINGLE EVENT and LB AND SB L LB OR SB LE for PEAK RECOGNI TION KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 172 OpenLAB Preparative Option EVENT The settings using the spectral similarity are quite similar to perform The differ SPECTRAL ence is that the similarity values have to be used as thresholds The maximum SIMILARITY value is 1 000 for absolute identical spectra FC Parameters at 6 00 min Signal 3 Relative to previous event min O a Ascending L Descend
269. to the Instrument Activity Log but cannot be stored in the original acquisition method attached to the data file This may not meet your GLP GMP requirements Note To change a running method without the full documentation of the change s does not meet the GLP GMP requirements Please make sure to note all changes in a reasonable form Due to that the method changes will not be stored in the original acquisition method attached to the data file we recommend always leave the option SAVE CHANGES IN TIME TABLE enabled and re analyze the chromatogram immediately KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Advanced Method Settings 143 KNAUER Instrument Control Method Options after acquisition with the changed method Also all methods used to analyze a chromatogram will be stored along with a chromatogram This will allow you to check the method changes later Please note this procedure in you lab note book SAVE CHANGES IN TIME TABLE This option can only be enabled disabled if the ENABLED check box for DIRECT CONTROL DURING A RUN Is activated If the SAVE CHANGES IN TIME TABLE option is checked any method changes via Direct Control will be saved in the method Otherwise the changes are only monitored in the Instrument Activity Log and in the audit trail refer to the OpenLAB Users man ual for more details As changes cannot be stored in the method which is attached as the original acquisition method to the data file we re
270. trument because devices may automatically receive a new IP address when reset r Device Information 172 16 6 101 51050 444093600007 Fig 30 LAN interface Device Information window SERIAL NUMBER If you have read out the device via LAN the serial number is added automatically Otherwise type in the serial number of the pump you are using The serial number of network controlled pumps is used for the device identification and addressing during communication This serial number must match the serial number of the defined pump If not an appropriate error mes sage will appear when a run is started HEAD Select the type of pump head you are using from the drop down list The pump head must also be selected in the pump s own menu The pump head selection does not depend from the head material The following pump heads are available Pump Pumphead ee pomsom oo 10m 50 mi aooo o Tom 50m Once you have chosen the pump head the related information about maxi mum flow and maximum pressure is displayed automatically If you have read out the device via LAN the pump head type is selected automatically PRESSURE UNITS Select the pressure units you want to use for the pump from the drop down list The choices are MPa bar and psi All control pressure fields in the pump tab of the instrument method window as well as the instrument sta tus window will be displayed in the selected pressure units The pressure uni
271. try Simulation of Stacked Injections For the simulation of stacked injection load the existing chromatogram of your sample into the Virtual Detector refer to the instrument setup of the Virtual Detector page 87 Program the desired number of stacked injections in the Injection Module or autosampler setup and the fraction table of the used frac tion collector If during a run a simulated stacked injection is performed the Virtual Detector will add the chromatogram starting from time 0 00 min at the time of the stacked injection This will be done for each simulated stacked KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Monitor Direct Con trol 187 OpenLAB Preparative Option injection The FRC table reset will also apply This allow to check if the selected parameters are fine for you sample Instrument Status Injection module If you open the instrument status you will find an own tab for the injection module Instrument Status ham System Status 1050 J Inj Module EJ JetStream Oven m9 s 2600 7 Valco MV FC Run Status Hold Pump Flow ml min 0 000 Pump Flow ml min n a Valve Position a Pump Serial Port COM4 SN 21 A Valve Serial Port COMB SN 5 Fig 271 Injection Module status window initial injection RUN STATUS Shows the current run status of the module If no run is performed the status is Hold During the initial injection the status Injecting wit
272. tton to start the search for all connected LAN devices of the currently configured type Please refer the picture below for the information which is displayed for the found devices If more than one is found all hits will be shown in the window Select the desired device from the shown list The software will read out infor mation such as serial number pump head and gradient mode from the pump and will fill it automatically into the configuration screen For pumps P 1 P 2 1L and S 1050 the gradient mode can be changed using the CONFIG SERVICE menu if necessary Please see the corresponding section below For all KNAUER LAN devices port 10001 is selected by default Don t change this set ting otherwise no communication can be established To search for an instru ment the device must be connected switched on and must have a valid IP address Optionally you can enter the IP address of your device if the option USE S N TO IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT is disabled Please note that when the device receives the IP address from a DHCP server e g a router the IP address may change if the device is switched off and switched on again Obtained using S M IP Fort 10001 Use S N to identify the instrument Fig 29 LAN interface dialog KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Pump Con figuration 26 Setup and Control of KNAUER HPLC Systems Note We highly recommend using the S N and not the IP address to identify the ins
273. tup for the autosamplers 3950 and AS 1 for details of the Stacked Injection setup of the autosampler Click on the button to open the Stacked Injections table dialog Stacked Injection Table Use Stacked Injection not defined Fig 265 Injection module Stacked injection table Make a right mouse click into the time table and select FILL TABLE from the corre sponding menu Stacked Injections Number of Injections Injection Wolume ml Injection Flow ml min Injection Duration mir Time between Injections min Fig 266 Injection module Stacked injections table setup NUMBER OF INJECTIONS Enter the number of stacked injections If you e g enter 5 tive stacked injections will be made in addition of the initial injection 6 injections at all will be made per run Please make sure that you have enough samples for the entered number of injection INJECTION VOLUME Enter the desired injection volume in ml INJECTION FLOW Enter the flow rate of the injection pump during the injection If no injection is prepared the pump is stopped During a run the injection mod ule s pump can only be controlled using the option DIRECT CONTROL DURING A RUN please refer the manual s appropriate chapter page 141 INJECTION DURATION The duration of the injection is calculated from the injection volume and the injection flow The reduced flow during start and stop of the pump is taken into account with 6 seconds i
274. two new lines 1 32 and 3 32 minutes with the fro zen gradient settings The gradient graphic on the right hand side also shows the new gradient The gradient table now ends after 10 45 minutes instead of 8 45 min HOLD PUMP CONTINUE You can hold the pump set flow to zero by clicking the HOLD Pump button This will neither pause the gradient table nor add an entry into the gradient table That means you cannot review your action later on beside the entry in the Instrument Activity Log If the pump hold is executed the buttons label will change to CONTINUE After clicking the CONTINUE button the pump s flow will start again in according to the gradient table In this case you should prolong the set run time via the menu sequence CONTROL EXTEND RUN In Our example it is required to extend the run time by 2 minutes You must close the SET NEW GRADIENT window to modify the method s run time Extend Run OF Extend run by 2 00 Minutes Cancel Help Fig 170 Extend run time window KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 Pump Instrument Status Purge 114 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method All direct control settings will also be stored in the Instrument Activity Log To access the log click on VIEW INSTRUMENT ACTIVITY LOG REFRESH Instrument Activity Log gt l B Refresh Add Manual Entry Print Selection Print All Activity a Matthias Matthias 01 08 2013 20 42 18 GMT 0
275. ument not in the tabs of the single devices KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 61 Creating an Instrument Control Method Instrument Setup Pumps The pump setup window shows several areas Their appearance depends well on the selected pump as well as on the settings selected while configuring it gradient mode pump head etc Fig 83 Instrument Setup pump S 1050 P 2 1L P 1 isocratic Fig 84 Instrument Setup pump S 1050 P 2 1L P 1 LPG Fig 85 Instrument Setup pump P 2 1L isobar KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 62 Creating an Instrument Control Method Fig 87 Instrument Setup pump P 4 1S P 2 1S 10P 20P S 100 isocratic Fig 88 Instrument Setup pump P 6 1L constant pressure 10 00 1 000 100 0 Fig 89 Instrument Setup pump P 6 1L constant flow Pump CYCLE TIME In case of isocratic or high pressure gradient no setting can be Instrument made In LPG mode you can define the CYCLE TIME of the valves from the drop Setup KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 63 Creating an Instrument Control Method down list The Cycle Time defines the time all valves of the LPG module that forms the current gradient open and close once CONTROL PRESSURE LIMITS This section allows you to enter the CONTROL PRESSURE LIMITS in the units which have been chosen in the pump configuration dialog If the measured pressure is higher than the MAx limit
276. ument directly even during a running method Changes made to the settings and applied during a run will be automatically stored in the method The corresponding new lines in the spreadsheets are marked with the comment DC Op Direct Control Opera tion Applied changes in a not running method will not be saved However it will be recorded in the Activity Log PRESSURE P 6 1L only The settings for the pressure are displayed when the function USE CONSTANT PRESSURE MODE in the pump configuration has been selected Specify the pressure in MPa and click the PRESSURE APPLY button to send the pressure to the pump KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 111 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method FLOW Specify the flow in ml min and click the FLow APPLY button to send the flow to the pump STOP The STOP button will interrupt delivery while the run time continues The pump remains in slave mode This button is also active during a run to stop the pump e g in an emergency situation This will not stop the whole method only the pump s flow As this is a method change the current method will be changed The SrTop will be added to the currently running method if the option SAVE CHANGES IN TIME TABLE of the DIRECT CONTROL DURING A RUN section of the Runtime Settings is enabled Please to refer the section Runtime Settings in the KNAUER Instrument Control Options for more information FLOW APPLY PRESSURE APPLY Pressing
277. us Assistant ASM 2 1L The Assistant status window allows for checking the current status of all config ured modules of the Assistant and the direct control KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 129 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method The status and direct control options on this window depend on the config ured modules Below the possible status options are described A Instrument Status ol Sc i System Status g JetStream Oven Ey UYD21L 9 ASM21L Run Status On Events A A lagi e a a I Ia ee ee Flow ml min 0 000 Flow 0 000 Appy Stop Events 000 lal Apply Pressure MPa 0 1 PMin 0 0 PMax 0 0 Apply Pump Purge gt l Valvefs Se Valvel ValveM Valvel ValveM Refresh GLP Potion 1 m LAN 172 16 6 102 10001 LJ SN FYA121400002 Fig 188 Instrument Status ASM 2 1L valve valve pump RUN STATUS The status ON will be displayed when the ASM 2 1L is ready to run pump is found valves have been initialized detector lamp is on The status ON Is also shown if a Pretreatment is running please refer to Pretreatment sec tion on page 64 During a run the Status Run and the current run time in min utes will be shown The Off status will be shown when no connection with the ASM 2 1L can be established or if the detector lamp is switched off EVENTS Digital Outputs The current state for each EVEN
278. utosampler 96 100 Mixing Chamber P 6 1L 27 ml Pick up Autosampler 98 Mobile Control 16 Model User Defined Detector 37 More Detector 34 Multi valve fraction collector Instrument Status 179 MultiValve Fraction Collector Configuration 158 Peak Recycling 159 Solvent Recycling 159 MW 1 Instrument Setup 74 N Name 10P 24 Autosampler 3950 46 Detector 33 Flowmeter 57 Optimas 51 P 2 1L 24 P 2 1S 4 1S 24 P 1 24 Pump 100 24 Pump 1050 24 Thermometer 58 Thermostat 55 User Defined Detector 37 Needle height Autosampler 99 Needle Wash Autosampler 95 99 New Autosampler 95 Number of boxes Interface Box 19 M 1 19 Manager 5050 19 Number of Injections Autosampler 103 O Optimas Device ID 51 First Destination Vial 52 Instrument Setup 94 Loop Volume 51 Name 51 Serial Number 51 Serial Port 51 Syringe Volume 51 Tray 52 Tray configuration 52 Tray cooling Prep mode 51 Tubing Volume 51 Vial Type 52 Output InterfaceBox 55 Manager 55 Output Mode KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 203 Index Fluorescence Detector 86 P P 2 1L Gradient Mode 24 Instrument Setup 61 Interface 24 Name 24 RS 232 25 P 2 1S 4 1S Gradient Mode 24 Instrument Setup 61 Interface 24 Name 24 RS 232 25 Type 24 P 6 1L Constant Pressure Mode 24 27 Mixing Chamber 27 P 1 Gradient Mode 24 Instrument Setup 61 Interface 24 Name 24 RS 232 25 Parity Detector 35 RF 20A Axs 36 Partia
279. vents 0000 f Events Apply Refresh GLP LAN 172 16 6 102 10001 SN ANA080600024 Diagnostics Fig 173 Instrument Status detector S 2550 RUN STATUS The status HOLD is displayed when no program is running other wise the Run Status displays a run time in minutes elapsed from the start of the run CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 The actual signal in units which have been chosen in the detector configuration dialog at the actual wavelength in nm is displayed for each active channel REFRESH GLP This section only available with connected KNAUER detectors displays GLP Good Laboratory Practice related information transferred to or downloaded from the detector Pressing the REFRESH GLP button will actualize this information The extent of the information depends on the given detector KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 116 Instrument Status of a Running Control Method Note The GLP information will not saved Geet GLP Information Instrument data Serial number ANAOSBO600024 Firmware version 1 11 Firmware subversion 009 Instrument installation date 11 09 2009 12 24 56 Last service date 08 06 2012 16 42 35 Last service code 1 Board working time 5382 1 h Grating motor working time 580 4h Optical properties Bandwidth at 656 nm 4 9 nm Wavelength accuracy Holmium and H Beta Line 1 360 8 at 360 9 Fig 174 GLP Information detector S 2550 Instrumen
280. w for this line is opened The automatically selected mode is SINGLE EVENT the event is LEVEL AND OR SLOPE The time level and slope values are automatically inserted escaped from the chromatogram Complete the param eter settings as necessary and close the parameter window Repeat this as often as different events have to be programmed For all lines added in this way a comment DC operation will be displayed Wavelength nm amp S Fig 255 Programming the fraction table KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 176 OpenLAB Preparative Option The colored squares below the graph indicate the status in running methods and are used for fraction tracing This also will be shown if a chromatogram of a run is loaded you have already collect fractions However those aspects will be described later in the chapter instrument status of a running control method page 177 In figure 256 an example for the fraction program of the above chromatogram is shown Oe yang Instrument Setup o a s 1050 69 s 3950 E JetStream Oven s 2600 L S3050FC 3x Aux Traces 3 Trigger Single Event Unconditional Single Event Sign Fig 256 Example for a fraction table PRETREATMENT The pretreatment option is only shown if a recycling valve has been selected in the fraction collector configuration dialog If you enable the pretreatment check box the button SETUP is accessibl
281. will be stored with the run data Auxiliary traces can not be exported after analysis Note Auxiliary traces can not be analyzed as detector traces can be To find out the values of such a trace select the correct trace for the Y axis in the graph s Axis Setup KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 113 Creating an Instrument Control Method Setting up a Trigger Any configured HPLC system with at least one detector acquisition channel will be completed by an additional tab for the trigger Click on the TRIGGER tab to designate the trigger type and to setup the synchro nization The trigger type determines how the data sampling and the gradient program s are started Instrument Setup roca gt fam eS Trigger Trigger Type None Sampling starts immediately after clicking on Start Sequence acquisitions do not pause between runs Manual Operator has to press Enter to start the run Sequence acquisitions pause for confirmation between runs External If the data sampling is started from an external tigger select this option The type of trigger is designated in instrument configuration Select when using a contact closure from an autosampler or manual injector Select desired injection source to perform the external trigger Time 8 25985 Minutes Amplitude 254 Wavelength nmi Wavelength nr Wavelength inm Fig 158 Setup window trigger tab TRIGGER TYPE Select the type of synchronization
282. ws the valves current position Valve s Wawel ValveM ValveL Yale Position 1 1 omens a Fig 191 ASM2 1L status tab Valve s POSITION Status The current position of all configured valves is shown For each valve the name given in the configuration is shown If the ASM 2 1L is configured using the Auto Configuration option the default name for a valve is Valve followed by an extension for the valve s position in the ASM 2 1L case L left M middle R right For KNAUER two position valves the position can be either injection or L load for Valco two position valves A or B For multi position valves the position can be 7 16 depending on the valve configura tion The right hand part of the Valve s section allows for direct control of the valve s independently from the method setup During a run this section is not accessible POSITION Direct Control Click on the arrow key l of the drop down menu The menu shows a list of possible valve positions For KNAUER 2 position valves the positions are injection and L load for Valco 2 position valves A and B and for multi position valves 7 16 depending on the valves configuration That means for a 6 position valves the available positions are 1 6 for a 16 position valve 1 16 SYSTEM The System section of the ASM 2 1L status window allows for changing the Events of the ASM 2 1L and provides access to the UV Diagnostics if an
283. ycling Foxy RI 1 eee ee ee eee 156 Solvent Peak Recycling S 3050 2 ce eee eee eee 156 Recycling valve setup 2 ee ee tee ene 157 Virtual Fraction Collector configuration window 157 MultiValve Fraction Collector configuration window 158 MultiValve Fraction Collector with 2 valves 158 Solvent Peak Recycling Multi Valve FC 04 159 Recycling Valve SCWD 2 0 cccec5 440 ebeusietesteinewensad 159 Own port recycling valve setup for 6 position valve 159 Instrument Setup Fraction collector 0008 161 Advanced collector settings 0 eee eee ee eee 162 Instrument Setup Fraction collector 0008 164 Selecting creating the rack configuration file 165 Fraction Collector Setup with rack configuration path 165 Fraction Collection Program Mode 2 ee eee 165 Fraction Collection Program Event if Mode selection Single Event 166 Fraction Collection Program Event if Mode selection Peak Recognition 166 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Unconditional Parameters 167 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Unconditional Parameters 167 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Signal Level Parameters 168 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Signal Level Parameters 169 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Signal Level Parameters
284. you have only to select the type of action and in case of COLLECT To the fraction vial After closing the window the parameter will be designed as TIMED in the PARAMETERS column The options Relative to previous event and Use as reference for correction next events will be explained generally at the end of the section parameters on page 173 ASCENDING SINGLE EVENT only Enter the level threshold value and define it to be on the ascending edge of the peak Then enter the expected possible shift EXPECTED INTERVAL for the retention time select the ACTION and the POSITION of the fractionation vial After closing the window the parameter will be desig nated as L FC Parameters at 0 00 min AD J Relative to previous ewent min O 0 Descending l C Use as reference for correction of next events Signal Level Unita Action Expected interval min 7 0 1 Action Waste Please notice that the parameters will 3 next position 0 be used in the Units selected for the Detection Channel Cancel Fig 243 Fraction Collection Program Single Event Signal Level Parameters DESCENDING SINGLE EVENT only Enter the level threshold value and define it to be on the descending flange of the peak Then enter the expected possible KNAUER OpenLAB Software Manual V2600 1 Version 1 4 169 OpenLAB Preparative Option shift EXPECTED INTERVAL for the retention time select the ACTION WASTE to end the fraction
285. yringe volume pl 250 r _ Tray cooling _ Prep mode Tray Cancel Help Fig 66 Autosampler KNAUER Optimas configuration window The configuration of the autosampler KNAUER Optimas must be equal to the configuration programmed in the autosampler If one or more settings do not match an appropriate error message will be shown in the software if you try to control the device NAME Enter a descriptive name for the autosampler This name will appear on the autosampler tab when the instrument setup or status windows are dis played Use a name which is unique within the instrument SERIAL NUMBER Type in the serial number of the autosampler you are using Device ID Select the device identifier for the autosampler from the drop down list This must match the settings of the autosampler being used To check the device identifier for the autosampler KNAUER Optimas press the SYSTEM MENU and then SERIAL buttons on the autosampler s keyboard The default identifier is 60 SERIAL PORT Select the number for the COM port on the PC to which the autosampler is connected On the autosampler s rear panel use the port S2 IN to connect the autosampler with the computer It is recommended to switch all DIP switches for the port to OFF position for a proper communication Loop VOLUME Enter the volume of the installed loop in ul If the Prep mode is enabled the loop volume is fixed on 10000 ul TUBING VOLUME Type in the volume

Open LAB Instrument-Control Software Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents